Перевод: со всех языков на все языки

со всех языков на все языки

care+killed+a+(

  • 81 hang

    hæŋ
    past tense, past participle - hung; verb
    1) (to put or fix, or to be put or fixed, above the ground eg by a hook: We'll hang the picture on that wall; The picture is hanging on the wall.) henge
    2) (to fasten (something), or to be fastened, at the top or side so that it can move freely but cannot fall: A door hangs by its hinges.) henge (opp/i)
    3) ((past tense, past participle hanged) to kill, or to be killed, by having a rope put round the neck and being allowed to drop: Murderers used to be hanged in the United Kingdom, but no-one hangs for murder now.) bli hengt, henge
    4) ((often with down or out) to be bending, drooping or falling downwards: The dog's tongue was hanging out; Her hair was hanging down.) henge (ned/ut)
    5) (to bow (one's head): He hung his head in shame.) henge med nebbet/hodet
    •
    - hanging
    - hangings
    - hangman
    - hangover
    - get the hang of
    - hang about/around
    - hang back
    - hang in the balance
    - hang on
    - hang together
    - hang up
    henge
    I
    subst. \/hæŋ\/
    1) ( måten noe henger på) henging, opphenging, fall
    2) ( om maskiner e.l.) innretning, virkemåte
    3) ( EDB) heng
    get the hang of ( hverdagslig) få tak(et) på noe, forstå meningen med noe, lære noe, skjønne sammenhengen
    give a hang eller care a hang gi blaffen i, gi pokker i
    II
    verb ( hun ng, i bet. 7 oftest: hanged -
    hanged) \/hæŋ\/
    1) henge (opp)
    2) henge, være opphengt
    3) ( også hang down) henge (med)
    4) behenge, pryde, utsmykke
    5) tapetsere
    6) drapere, la falle
    7) ( henrette) henge(s i galgen), bli hengt
    8) sveve, henge (i luften), flyte
    9) være uviss
    10) (amer., om jury) ikke kunne bli enig
    11) ( EDB) henge
    be hung over være i bakrus
    hang! eller hang it (all)! pokker også!
    • hang the expense!
    • well I'll be hanged!
    • I'll be hanged if...
    så pokker om jeg...
    hang about eller hang around gå og drive, drive dank, stå og henge, stå og vente, drive omkring
    hang a few on ( hverdagslig) ta seg noen drinker, ta seg noen øl
    hang a jury (amer., om jurymedlem) forklaring: hindre en jury fra å fatte en enstemmig beslutning
    hang back\/off holde seg tilbake, holde seg i bakgrunnen nøle, betenke seg, kvie seg
    hang behind henge etter, drøye, somle
    hang between life and death sveve mellom liv og død
    hang, draw and quarter ( historisk) henge, sprette opp og partere gi noen hard straff
    hang fire ( om skytevåpen) ikke gå av med en gang gå tregt, trekke i langdrag, være treg
    hang in the air være uløst, være uvisst
    hang in the balance være uviss(t), henge i en tråd, ikke være avgjort
    hang in there! (spesielt amer.) hold ut!, ikke gi opp!, stå på!
    hang loose ta det rolig
    hang on (som prep. også) hang upon komme an på, avhenge av ( på telefon) hold linjen! høre godt etter, lytte nøye gå tregt, trekke i langdrag
    holde ut vente litt, vente en kort stund
    • hang on a minute!
    vent litt! \/ vent et øyeblikk!
    hang one on ( hverdagslig) bli full, gå på fylla
    hang one's hat (amer., hverdagslig) bo, ha sitt bosted, ha sitt hjem
    hang on someone's lips lytte oppmerksomt til alt noen sier
    hang on to ( også overført) holde seg fast til, henge seg på, klamre seg til
    holde på, beholde
    hang out henge ut (klær e.l.) ( om tunge e.l.) henge ut ( hverdagslig) holde til, holde hus, oppholde seg
    hang over henge over
    ( hverdagslig) noe som er blitt til overs, noe som er blitt tilbake
    hang someone out to dry (spesielt amer., hverdagslig) la noen i stikken
    hang together holde sammen, gå sammen, henge sammen, stemme overens
    hang tough holde ut, ikke gi opp
    hang up legge på hyllen, utsette, drøye
    ( telekommunikasjon) legge på (røret) henge opp
    hang up on someone legge på røret, bryte forbindelsen
    hang with someone ( hverdagslig) være sammen med, henge sammen med, vanke med
    • are you saying you've spent the entire day hanging with that jerk?
    be hung (up) on være fiksert av, være besatt av, være vill etter
    hung up ( slang) heftet, forsinket, forhindret deprimert følelsmessig forvirret eller forstyrret, med psykiske problemer
    I'll see you hanged first! pokker heller!, ikke faen!
    let it all hang out slappe av, ikke ha noen hemninger snakke rett fra levra, være åpen(hjertig), være frittalende
    let things hang ( hverdagslig) gi blaffen i saker og ting

    English-Norwegian dictionary > hang

  • 82 niewiele

    num.
    Ins. - oma l. -u ( przy rzeczowniku policzalnym) few, not many; (przy rzeczowniku niepoliczalnym, czasowniku, przymiotniku) little, not much.
    adv.
    (= mało) little, not much; niewiele sobie robić z kogoś/czegoś not to care much about sb/sth; niewiele myśląc not thinking much; niewiele mówiący tytuł a title that doesn't say much; niewiele brakowało, żeby zginął he nearly got killed.

    The New English-Polish, Polish-English Kościuszko foundation dictionary > niewiele

  • 83 नन्दः _nandḥ

    नन्दः [नन्द्-भावे घञ्]
    1 Happiness, pleasure, joy.
    -2 A kind of lute (11 inches long). (MW. 7 inches).
    -3 A frog.
    -4 N. of Viṣṇu.
    -5 N. of a cowherd, husband of Yaśodā and foster-father of Kṛiṣṇa (to whose care the child was committed when Kaṁsa wanted to destroy it).
    -6 N. of the founder of the Nanda dynasty; or of nine brother-kings of Pāṭaliputra killed by the machinations of Chāṇakya, the minister of Chandragupta; समुत्खाता नन्दा नव हृदयरोगा इव भुवः Mu. 1.13; अगृहीते राक्षसे किमुत्खातं नन्दवंशस्य Mu.1.27;3.28.
    -7 One of the nine treasures of Kubera.
    -8 Number 'nine' (from the nine Nandas.).
    -दी An epithet of Durgā.
    -Comp. -आत्मजः, -नन्दनः an epithet of Kṛiṣṇa
    -पालः an epithet of Varuṇa.
    -प्रयागः N. of a sacred place.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > नन्दः _nandḥ

  • 84 hang

    [hæŋ]
    past tense, past participle - hung; verb
    1) (to put or fix, or to be put or fixed, above the ground eg by a hook: We'll hang the picture on that wall; The picture is hanging on the wall.) pendurar
    2) (to fasten (something), or to be fastened, at the top or side so that it can move freely but cannot fall: A door hangs by its hinges.) segurar
    3) ((past tense, past participle hanged) to kill, or to be killed, by having a rope put round the neck and being allowed to drop: Murderers used to be hanged in the United Kingdom, but no-one hangs for murder now.) enforcar
    4) ((often with down or out) to be bending, drooping or falling downwards: The dog's tongue was hanging out; Her hair was hanging down.) pender
    5) (to bow (one's head): He hung his head in shame.) baixar (a cabeça)
    •
    - hanging
    - hangings
    - hangman
    - hangover
    - get the hang of
    - hang about/around
    - hang back
    - hang in the balance
    - hang on
    - hang together
    - hang up
    * * *
    [hæŋ] n 1 declive, ladeira. 2 o modo de assentar, caimento (vestido, cortina, etc.). 3 sl modo, jeito de uma coisa, funcionamento (de máquina). • vt+vi (ps and pp hung) 1 pender, pendurar. 2 suspender(-se), estar suspenso. 3 enforcar(-se), ser enforcado. 4 inclinar. 5 projetar-se sobre. 6 forrar, atapetar. 7 pairar. 8 estar em dúvida. 9 impedir uma decisão judicial. 10 tardar, perder tempo, protelar, vadiar. 11 estar à mostra ou em exposição. don’t care a hang! pouco se me dá!, pouco me importa! hang it (all)! o diabo que carregue (tudo) isto! hang you! o diabo que o carregue! hang your number up to dry sl você ainda cheira a cueiros. let it all hang out faça o que você quiser. time hangs heavy upon my hands estou enfadado, enfastiado. to be hung up on (ou about) something ficar, estar ansioso sem necessidade, estar aflito, ter uma idéia fixa. to get the hang of compreender, entender o significado de. I got the hang of it / compreendi o quê da coisa. to hang about (ou around) a) passar ou matar o tempo. b) permanecer. to hang about someone ficar em volta de alguém. to hang a hard sl ficar de pau duro, ter ereção. to hang around ficar andando à toa. to hang around with a) relacionar-se com alguém. b) Braz coll sair com alguém. to hang back hesitar, vacilar. to hang by a thread estar por um fio. to hang fire a) negar fogo (arma). b) fig hesitar, vacilar. to hang in sl esperar. to hang in doubt estar em dúvida. to hang loose sl fazer nada, estar relaxado. to hang off a) soltar, deixar solto, deixar ir. b) hesitar, vacilar. to hang on a) segurar firmemente. b) esperar. c) continuar a fazer algo apesar das dificuldades. d) depender de. e) persistir. to hang oneself enforcar-se. to hang out a) passar o tempo em um lugar ou com alguém. b) pendurar roupas no varal. c) expor, deixar à mostra para venda. to hang out for insistir. to hang over a) inclinar-se. b) pairar sobre, ameaçar. to hang together a) ficarem juntos, unidos. b) serem consistentes. c) conectar, ligar. to hang tough estar decidido, resoluto. to hang up a) suspender. b) adiar. c) desligar (telefone). d) pendurar, dependurar. to hang up on someone interromper no meio o telefonema com alguém. to hang upon something estar afeiçoado a alguma coisa.

    English-Portuguese dictionary > hang

  • 85 have

    (to have or keep (something) in case or until it is needed: If you go to America please keep some money in reserve for your fare home.) ter de reserva
    * * *
    [hæv; həv] vt+vi (ps and pp had) 1 ter, haver, possuir. 2 sofrer. 3 manter, reter (na memória). 4 conter, compreender. 5 ter de, precisar, ser obrigado a, dever. you have to pay / você precisa pagar. we shall have to wait / teremos de esperar. 6 permitir, tolerar, admitir. I will not have it / não o admito. 7 tomar, beber. have a cup of tea! / tome uma chícara de chá! 8 comer. as good luck would have it felizmente. as the proverb has it conforme diz o provérbio. God have you in his keeping! Deus o guarde! have a look at it dê uma olhada nisso. have a nice trip! boa viagem! have a smoke? deseja fumar? have at you! tome cuidado! have done! pare!, pare com isso! have him in faça-o entrar. have it in mind! não se esqueça disso! have it your own way faça o que quiser. have the kindness to tell me tenha a bondade de me dizer. have you got the letter? yes, I have! recebeu a carta? sim, recebi! have your hair cut mande cortar o cabelo. he had a son born to him nasceu-lhe um filho. he had his horse killed seu cavalo foi morto. he has a new hat on ele está com um chapéu novo. he will have arrived ele terá chegado. I am having my hair cut estou cortando o cabelo. I had as well eu faria bem em. I had best go o melhor seria se eu fosse. I had better go seria melhor se eu fosse. I had him up a) eu o fiz subir. b) processei-o. I had it out with him entendi-me, expliquei-me com ele. I had rather eu preferiria. I have eaten tenho comido. I have it by his own mouth eu o soube de sua própria boca. I have no cash about me não tenho dinheiro comigo. I should have been able to come teria sido possível vir, poderia ter vindo. I would have them gone eu queria que eles se fossem. I would have you know você deve saber. now I have it agora compreendo. there I had him aí pude pegá-lo, aí o tinha eu. they will have many presents eles receberão muitos presentes. to have a nice time divertir-se. to have a try experimentar. to have a wash lavar-se. to have care of cuidar de, tomar providências acerca de. to have dinner jantar. to have got hurt ferir-se, ficar ferido. to have in keeping guardar, custodiar. to have it by heart saber de cor, de memória. to have it on someone superar, avantajar-se sobre alguém. to have on a) usar (roupa). b) planejar tomar parte em algo. we had better wait será melhor esperarmos. we had him on gozamos com a cara dele. we have your future at heart temos muito interesse em seu futuro. we shall have rain teremos chuva. what will (ou would) you have me do? que quer você que eu faça? you have it você compreendeu, acertou. you have me, have you not? você me entendeu, não é? you have my word for it dou-lhe minha palavra que. you’ll have it! você vai apanhar! you may have it for your own pode ficar com isso.

    English-Portuguese dictionary > have

  • 86 pour

    pour [puʀ]
    ━━━━━━━━━
    ━━━━━━━━━
    1. <
       a. ( = en faveur de) for
    • je suis pour ! (inf) I'm all for it! (inf)
       b. (lieu) for
       c. (temps) for
    • tu en as pour combien de temps ? how long are you going to be?
    • ne m'attendez pas, j'en ai encore pour une heure don't wait for me, I'll be another hour
       d. ( = à la place de) for
       e. (rapport) for
    • c'est bien trop cher pour ce que c'est ! it's far too expensive for what it is!
    • pour un Anglais, il parle bien le français he speaks French well for an Englishman
       f. (intention, but) for
    • c'est fait pour ! (inf) that's what it's meant for!
    ► pour + infinitif to
       g. (cause) pour quelle raison ? for what reason?
    • pourquoi se faire du souci pour ça ? why worry about that?
    ► pour + infinitif passé
    • pour peu qu'il ait un peu bu, il va raconter n'importe quoi if he's had even the smallest drink he'll say anything
       h. ( = du point de vue de, concernant) pour moi, elle était déjà au courant if you ask me, she already knew
    • et pour les billets, c'est toi qui t'en charges ? so, you'll take care of the tickets, will you?
       i. ( = en échange de) donnez-moi pour 20 € de cerises give me 20 euros' worth of cherries, please
    • il l'a eu pour 10 € he got it for 10 euros
    • j'en ai eu pour 50 € de photocopies it cost me 50 euros to do the photocopies
       j. ( = comme) as
    • pour un sale coup, c'est un sale coup ! (inf) of all the awful things to happen!
    • pour une surprise, c'est une surprise ! this really is a surprise!
    2. <
    * * *

    I puʀ

    pour cela, il faudra faire — to do that, you'll have to do

    c'était pour rire or plaisanter — it was a joke

    il est seul mais il a tout fait pour — (colloq) he's on his own, but it's entirely his own doing

    c'est fait or étudié pour! — (colloq) ( c'est sa fonction) that's what it's for

    c'est bien payé mais pour la sécurité de l'emploi... — the pay is good but as regards job security...

    oui, c'est pour quoi? — yes, what is it?

    pour moi, il a tort — as far as I am concerned, he's wrong

    4) ( en faveur de) for

    je suis pour — (colloq) I'm in favour [BrE]

    être pour quelque chose/faire quelque chose — gén to be in favour [BrE] of something/doing something

    6) ( comme)
    7) ( à la place de) for

    ‘il te parlera du Japon’ - ‘pour ce que ça m'intéresse!’ — ‘he'll talk to you about Japan’ - ‘I can't say I'm very interested’

    pour être intelligente, ça elle l'est! — she really is intelligent!, intelligent she certainly is!

    il n'en a plus pour longtemps — ( mourant) he doesn't have long to live


    II puʀ
    nom masculin

    ••
    pour + verbe
    Lorsque pour sert à indiquer un but il se traduit généralement par to devant un verbe à l'infinitif: sortir pour acheter un journal = to go out to buy a newspaper; pour faire des meringues, il faut des oeufs = to make meringues, you need eggs
    Il peut également se traduire par in order to, qui est plus soutenu: pour mettre fin aux hostilités = in order to put an end to hostilities
    Quand pour est suivi d'une forme négative, il se traduira par so as not to ou in order not to: pour ne pas oublier = so as not to forget; pour ne pas rater le train = so as not to miss the train, in order not to miss the train
    Lorsque pour relie deux actions distinctes sans relation de cause à effet, il sera traduit par and et le verbe conjugué normalement: elle s'endormit pour se réveiller deux heures plus tard = she fell asleep and woke up two hours later. Quand la deuxième action n'est pas souhaitable ou qu'une notion de hasard malheureux est sous-entendue, on traduira par only to: she fell asleep only to wake up two hours later; il partit à la guerre pour se faire tuer trois jours plus tard = he went off to war only to be killed three days later
    pour + nom ou pronom
    Lorsque pour sert à indiquer la destination au sens large il se traduit généralement par for: le train pour Pau = the train for Pau; pour vendredi = for Friday; il travaille pour elle = he works for her
    Lorsque pour signifie en ce qui concerne, il se traduira le plus souvent par about: tu te renseignes pour une assurance voiture/pour samedi? = will you find out about car insurance/about Saturday?
    Attention: pour placé en début de phrase se traduira par as regards: pour l'argent, rien n'est décidé = as regards the money, nothing has been decided ou nothing has been decided about the money
    Lorsque pour signifie comme il se traduit souvant par as: je l'ai eu pour professeur = I had him as a teacher
    Lorsque pour relie un terme redoublé il se traduit parfois par for: mot pour mot = word for word; mais ce n'est pas toujours le cas: jour pour jour = to the day. On se reportera au nom dans le dictionnaire
    * * *
    puʀ
    1. prép
    1) (destination, finalité) for

    C'est un cadeau pour toi. — It's a present for you.

    pour faire qch — to do sth, in order to do sth

    Je lui ai téléphoné pour l'inviter. — I phoned him to invite him.

    J'ai ajouté une cornière pour consolider l'ensemble. — I added a bracket to make it all a bit stronger.

    pour aller à Strasbourg, s'il vous plaît? — which way is it to Strasbourg, please?

    Je lui ai prêté mon pull pour qu'elle n'ait pas froid. — I lent her my jumper so that she wouldn't be cold.

    pour moi (= à mon avis) — in my view, (= pour ma part) for my part, personally

    Pour moi, il ne dit pas toute la vérité. — In my view he's not telling the whole truth.

    Pour moi, je vais dorénavant être plus prudent. — For my part, I shall be more cautious from now on.

    3) (cause) for

    On l'a mis en prison pour un délit mineur. — He was jailed for a minor offence.

    Il a été critiqué pour avoir posé sa candidature. — He was criticized for applying.

    pour riche que... — rich though...

    pour 100 euros de... — 100 euros' worth of...

    Donnez-moi pour 20 euros d'essence. — Give me 20 euros' worth of petrol.

    2. nm
    (= avantage)
    * * *
    I.
    pour ⇒ Note d'usage prép
    1 ( indiquant le but) to; pour cela, il faudra faire to do that, you'll have to do; pour bien faire il faudrait partir tôt to be really sure we should leave early; c'était pour rire or plaisanter it was a joke; il est seul mais il a tout fait pour○ he's on his own, but it's entirely his own doing; pour que so that; que faire pour qu'elle comprenne? how can we get her to understand?; pour ainsi dire so to speak; quelque chose pour le mal de tête/le rhume something for headaches/colds; c'est fait or étudié pour○! ( c'est sa fonction) that's what it's for; bien sûr tu peux en manger, c'est fait pour! of course you can eat some, that's what it's there for!;
    2 ( indiquant une destination) for; le train pour Paris ( prêt à partir) the train for Paris; ( plus général) the train to Paris; l'avion pour Paris the Paris plane, the plane to Paris; c'est le train pour où? where does this train go?; il faut une heure pour Oloron it's an hour to Oloron;
    3 ( en ce qui concerne) j'ai choisi le sujet d'étude mais pour l'université je ne sais pas encore I've decided on my subject but as regards the university I'm not sure yet ou but I'm not sure about the university yet; c'est bien payé mais pour la sécurité de l'emploi… the pay is good but as regards job security ou as far as job security goes…; oui, c'est pour quoi? yes, what is it?; ( plus poli) yes, what can I do for you?; pour moi, il a tort as far as I am concerned, he's wrong; qu'est-il pour toi, un ami? how do you see him? as a friend?;
    4 ( en faveur de) for; voter pour un candidat to vote for a candidate; 120 voix pour et 95 contre 120 votes for and 95 against; c'est pour la recherche contre le cancer it's for ou in aid of cancer research; je suis pour○ I'm in favourGB; être pour qch/faire qch gén to be in favourGB of sth/doing sth; je suis pour que Catherine reste I'm in favourGB of Catherine staying; je suis pour les Verts I'm for the ecologists; je suis pour Paris Sport I support Paris;
    5 ( avec une indication de temps) for; ce sera prêt pour vendredi? will it be ready for ou by Friday?; pour plus tard/aujourd'hui for later/today; pour toujours forever; pour le moment or l'instant for the moment, for the time being; le bébé/le baptême c'est pour quand? when is the baby due/the christening?;
    6 ( comme) elle a pour ambition d'être pilote her ambition is to be a pilot; elle a pour principe de ne jamais emprunter de l'argent it's a rule with her ou it's one of her principles never to borrow money; ils ont pour habitude de déjeuner tard they usually have a late lunch; n'avoir pour toute arme qu'un bâton to be armed only with a stick; il n'avait qu'un pantalon pour tout vêtement he was wearing nothing but a pair of trousers GB ou pants US;
    7 ( à la place de) for; écrire qch pour qch to write sth instead of sth; je l'ai pris pour plus bête qu'il n'est I thought he was more stupid than he really is; je suis ici pour ma collègue I'm here in place of my colleague;
    8 ( à son avantage) elle avait pour elle de savoir écouter/la patience she had the merit of being a good listener/being patient;
    9 ( introduisant une concession) pour intelligent qu'il soit intelligent though he may be; ‘il te parlera du Japon’-‘pour ce que ça m'intéresse!’ ‘he'll talk to you about Japan’-‘I can't say I'm very interested’; pour peu qu' il y ait du monde sur la route nous serons en retard there only has to be a bit of traffic and we'll be late; pour autant que je sache as far as I know;
    10 ( marquant l'emphase) pour être intelligente, ça elle l'est! she really is intelligent!, intelligent she certainly is!;
    11 ( indiquant une quantité) j'ai mis pour 50 euros d'essence I've put in 50 euros' worth of petrol GB ou gas US; merci pour tout thank you for everything; pleurer pour un rien to cry over nothing; s'inquiéter pour un rien to fret about nothing; je n'y suis pour rien I had nothing to do with it; ne t'inquiète pas pour si peu don't worry about a little thing like that; tu y es bien pour quelque chose si elle est malheureuse if she's miserable, it has certainly got something to do with you; il y est pour beaucoup si elle est malheureuse if she's miserable, he's largely to blame; elle y est pour beaucoup s'il a réussi if he has succeeded a lot of the credit should go to her; je n'en ai pas pour longtemps it won't take long; il n'en a plus pour longtemps ( mourant) he doesn't have long to live; j'en ai encore pour deux heures it'll take another two hours; j'en ai pour une minute it'll only take a minute;
    12 ( indiquant une cause) for; se battre pour une femme to fight over a woman; être battu pour avoir menti to be beaten for lying; ⇒ oui;
    13 ( introduisant une proportion) dix pour cent ten per cent; pour 250 employés, seulement 28 sont des femmes out of 250 employees only 28 are female; une cuillère de vinaigre pour quatre d'huile one spoonful of vinegar to four of oil; pour une large part to a large extent.
    II.
    pour nm le pour et le contre pros and cons (pl).
    [pur] préposition
    1. [indiquant le lieu où l'on va] for
    2. [dans le temps - indiquant le moment] for
    pourriez-vous avoir fini pour lundi/demain? could you have it finished for Monday/tomorrow?
    [indiquant la durée] for
    3. [exprimant la cause]
    elle est pour beaucoup dans le succès de la pièce the success of the play is to a large extent due to her, she has had a great deal to do with the success of the play
    ne me remerciez pas, je n'y suis pour rien don't thank me, I didn't have anything to do with it
    4. [exprimant la conséquence] to
    il a erré trois heures en forêt pour se retrouver à son point de départ he wandered for three hours in the forest, only to find he was back where he'd started from
    5. [capable de]
    6. [par rapport à] for
    7. [avec une valeur emphatique]
    pour un champion, c'est un champion! that's what I call a (real) champion!
    perdre pour perdre, autant que ce soit en beauté if we are going to lose, we might as well do it in style
    pour être en colère, je l'étais! I was so angry!
    8. [indiquant une proportion, un pourcentage] per
    9. [moyennant]
    10. [à la place de] for
    11. [au nom de] for, on behalf of
    pour le directeur [dans la correspondance] pp Director
    12. [en guise de, en qualité de]
    prendre quelqu'un pour époux/épouse to take somebody to be one's husband/wife
    avoir quelqu'un pour ami/professeur to have somebody as a friend/teacher
    j'ai pour principe que... I believe on principle that...
    le livre a pour titre... the book's title is..., the book is entitled...
    13. [indiquant l'attribution, la destination, le but] for
    c'est pour quoi faire, ce truc? what's that thing for?
    a. [recette] serves 4
    b. [couchage] sleeps 4
    je suis venu pour vous voir I'm here ou I've come to see you
    si tu veux réussir, il faut tout faire pour if you want to succeed you have to do everything possible
    15. [en faveur de] for, in favour of
    voter pour quelqu'un to vote for ou in favour of somebody
    16. [du point de vue de]
    ça compte peu pour toi, mais pour moi c'est tellement important it matters little to you but to ou for me it's so important
    pour moi, il a dû se réconcilier avec elle if you ask me, he must have made it up with her
    17. [en ce qui concerne]
    pour certains de nos collègues, la situation est inchangée as far as some of our colleagues are concerned, the situation has not changed
    pour ce qui est de l'avancement, voyez avec le responsable du personnel as far as promotion is concerned, see the personnel officer
    18. (soutenu) [exprimant la concession]
    pour être jeune, elle n'en est pas moins compétente young though she is she's very able
    [en corrélation avec 'que']
    pour patient qu'il soit, il ne supportera pas cette situation for all his patience, he won't put up with this situation
    il était pour partir he was about to leave ou on the point of leaving
    ————————
    [pur] nom masculin invariable
    les pour l'emportent POLITIQUE (humoristique) the argument in favour is overwhelming, the ayes have it
    ————————
    pour que locution conjonctive
    1. [exprimant le but] so that, in order that (formal)
    j'ai pris des places non-fumeurs pour que vous ne soyez pas incommodés par la fumée I've got non-smoking seats so that you won't be bothered by the smoke
    2. [exprimant la conséquence]

    Dictionnaire Français-Anglais > pour

  • 87 vouloir

    vouloir [vulwaʀ]
    ━━━━━━━━━
    ━━━━━━━━━
    ➭ TABLE 31
    1. <
       a. to want
    • qu'est-ce qu'ils veulent maintenant ? what do they want now?
    • il en veut (inf) ( = veut réussir) he wants to win
    • je ne veux pas qu'il se croie obligé de... I don't want him to feel he has to...
    • que lui voulez-vous ? what do you want with him?
    • qu'est-ce qu'il me veut, celui-là ? (inf) what does he want from me?
    • s'il voulait, il pourrait être ministre if he wanted to, he could be a minister
    • que voulez-vous de moi ? what do you want from me?
    • j'en veux 1 000 € I want 1,000 euros for it(PROV) vouloir, c'est pouvoir(PROV) quand on veut, on peut(PROV) where there's a will there's a way
    • vouloir que qn fasse qch/que qch se fasse to want sb to do sth/sth to be done
       b. ( = désirer, souhaiter) voulez-vous à boire ? would you like something to drink?
    • je voulais vous dire... I meant to tell you...
    • il voulait partir hier mais... he intended to leave yesterday but...
    • ça te dirait d'aller à la mer ? -- je veux ! (inf!) would you like to go to the seaside? -- that would be great! (inf)
    • ça va comme tu veux ? (inf) is everything all right?
    • bon, comme tu voudras all right, have it your own way
    • oui, si on veut ( = dans un sens, d'un côté) yes, if you like
    • est-ce que tu en veux ? [+ gâteau] would you like some?
    ► que veux-tu ?
    • que veux-tu, c'est comme ça, on n'y peut rien what can you do? that's the way it is and there's nothing we can do about it
    • que veux-tu que je te dise ? j'ai perdu what do you want me to say? I lost
    • je voudrais bien voir ça ! I'd like to see that!
    • tu veux bien leur dire que... would you please tell them that...
    • encore un peu de thé ? -- je veux bien more tea? -- yes, please
    • nous en parlerons plus tard, si vous le voulez bien we'll talk about it later, if you don't mind
    • moi je veux bien, mais... fair enough (inf), but...
       e. (formules de politesse) voudriez-vous avoir l'obligeance or l'amabilité de... would you be so kind as to...
    • voudriez-vous fermer la fenêtre ? would you mind closing the window?
    • si vous voulez bien me suivre this way, please
       f. (ordre) veux-tu te taire ! will you be quiet!
       g. ( = essayer de) to try
       h. ( = s'attendre à) to expect
    • comment voulez-vous que je sache ? how should I know?
    • avec 1 000 € par mois, comment veux-tu qu'elle s'en sorte ? how do you expect her to manage on 1,000 euros a month?
    • que voulez-vous qu'on y fasse ? what do you expect us (or them etc) to do about it?
       i. ( = affirmer) to claim
    • une philosophie qui veut que l'homme soit... a philosophy which claims that man is...
       j. ( = requérir) to require
    • l'usage veut que... custom requires that...
       k. ( = faire) [destin, sort] le hasard voulut que... as luck would have it...
       l. (locutions)
    • tu ne m'en veux pas ? no hard feelings?
    • qu'est-ce que ça veut dire ? what does this mean?
    2. <
    • vouloir de qn/qch to want sb/sth
    3. <
    4. <
    * * *

    I
    1. vulwaʀ
    1) ( exiger) to want

    qu'est-ce qu'ils nous veulent (colloq) encore? — what do they want now?

    2) (désirer, souhaiter)

    que veux-tu boire? — what do you want to drink?; ( plus poli) what would you like to drink?

    il ne suffit pas de vouloir, il faut encore pouvoir — wishing is not enough

    tu veux que je te dise, c'est un escroc — I hate to say it, but he is a crook

    sans le vouloir — [bousculer, révéler] by accident; [se retrouver] accidentally

    ‘qu'est-ce qu'on fait ce soir?’ - ‘comme tu veux or voudras’ — ‘what shall we do tonight?’ - ‘whatever you like, it's up to you’

    tu ne veux/voudrais pas me faire croire que — you're not telling/trying to tell me that

    après ce qu'il a fait, tu voudrais que je lui fasse confiance? — do you expect me to trust him after what he's done?

    que veux-tu, on n'y peut rien! — what can you do, it's hopeless!

    j'aurais voulu t'y voir! — (colloq) I'd like to have seen you in the same position!

    3) ( accepter)

    voudriez-vous avoir l'obligeance de faire — fml would you be so kind as to do

    voulez-vous répéter votre question, s'il vous plaît — would you repeat your question please

    veuillez patienter — ( au téléphone) please hold the line

    je veux bien qu'il soit malade mais — I know he's ill, but

    ‘ce n'est pas cher/difficile’ - ‘si on veut!’ — ‘it's not expensive/difficult’ - ‘or so you say!’

    4) ( signifier)

    qu'est-ce que ça veut dire? — ( signification) what does that mean?; ( attitude) what's all this about?


    2.
    en vouloir verbe transitif indirect
    1) (colloq) ( être déterminé)

    il réussira, il en veut! — he wants to get on, and he'll succeed!


    3.
    se vouloir verbe pronominal
    1) ( prétendre être) [personne] to like to think of oneself as; [ouvrage, théorie, méthode] to be meant to be
    2) ( chercher à être) to try to be
    ••

    vouloir c'est pouvoir — Proverbe where there's a will there's a way


    II vulwaʀ
    nom masculin Philosophie will
    * * *
    vulwaʀ
    1. vt
    1) (= exiger, désirer) to want

    Elle veut un vélo pour Noël. — She wants a bike for Christmas.

    Elle en veux trois. — She wants three of them.

    Je ne veux pas de dessert. — I don't want any pudding.

    Il ne veut pas venir. — He doesn't want to come.

    Voulez-vous du thé? — Would you like some tea?, Do you want some tea?

    Je voudrais ceci. — I would like this one.

    Je voudrais faire... — I would like to do...

    On va au cinéma? - Si tu veux. — Shall we go to the cinema? - If you like.

    sans le vouloir (= involontairement) — without meaning to, unintentionally

    Je l'ai vexé sans le vouloir. — I upset him without meaning to.

    2) [destin, circonstances]

    le hasard a voulu que... — as fate would have it,...

    la tradition veut que... — Tradition has it that...

    4) (= consentir)

    je veux bien (bonne volonté) — I'll be happy to, (concession) fair enough, that's fine, (en acceptant une proposition) I'd love to

    Je veux bien le faire à ta place si ça t'arrange. — I don't mind doing it for you if you prefer.

    Voulez-vous une tasse de thé? - Je veux bien. — Would you like a cup of tea? - Yes please.

    5)

    en vouloir à qn (rancune) — to be angry at sb, to bear sb a grudge

    Il m'en veut de ne pas l'avoir invité à mon anniversaire. — He's angry at me for not inviting him to my birthday party.

    6)

    Il en veut à mon argent. — He's after my money.

    oui, si on veut (= en quelque sorte) — yes, if you like

    en vouloir (= être ambitieux) — to want to get on in life

    vouloir de (= être prêt à accepter) — to want

    La compagnie ne veut plus de lui. — The firm doesn't want him any more.

    Elle ne veut pas de son aide. — She doesn't want his help.

    mais enfin, qu'est-ce que ça veut dire? — what's all this about then?

    2. nm

    le bon vouloir de qn — sb's goodwill, sb's pleasure

    * * *
    vouloir verb table: vouloir
    A nm Philos will; bon vouloir goodwill; dépendre du bon vouloir de qn to depend on sb's goodwill; attendre le bon vouloir de qn to wait at sb's pleasure sout.
    B vtr
    1 ( exiger) to want; je veux une voiture/une nouvelle secrétaire I want a car/a new secretary; elle veut partir/que tout soit fini avant 8 heures she wants to leave/everything finished by 8 o'clock; que voulez-vous d'elle? what do you want from her?; qu'est-ce qu'ils nous veulent○ encore? what more do they want of us?; il vend sa voiture, il en veut 3 000 euros he's selling his car, he wants 3,000 euros for it; comme le veut la loi/la coutume as the law/custom demands; le règlement voudrait que tu portes une cravate you're normally required to wear a tie; ⇒ fin;
    2 (désirer, souhaiter) que veux-tu boire/pour Noël? what do you want to drink/for Christmas?; ( plus poli) what would you like to drink/for Christmas?; comme tu veux or voudras as you wish; je voudrais un kilo de poires/vous parler en privé I'd like a kilo of pears/to speak to you in private; je comprends très bien que tu ne veuilles pas répondre I can quite understand that you may not wish to reply; tu vois que tu y arrives quand tu (le) veux you see you can do it when you really want to; il ne suffit pas de vouloir, il faut encore pouvoir wishing is not enough; ce n'était pas si difficile que ça, il suffisait de vouloir it wasn't that difficult, all you needed was the will to do it; elle veut/voudrait être astronaute she wants/would like to be an astronaut; je ne veux pas d'elle comme secrétaire I don't want her as a secretary; je ne veux pas de ce tableau dans ma chambre I don't want that picture in my room; je n'en veux pas, de ton argent! I don't want your money!; elle veut ton bonheur or que tu sois heureux she wants you to be happy; je voudrais bien rester/vous aider, mais I would like to stay/to help you, but; ils auraient bien voulu participer à la réunion d'hier they would have liked to have taken part in yesterday's meeting; je voudrais bien qu'on finisse avant la nuit I would like us to finish before tonight; nous aurions également voulu ajouter que we would also have liked to add that; je voulais vous dire que I wanted to tell you that; on dira ce qu'on voudra, c'était moins pollué avant they can say what they like, it was less polluted before; tu veux que je te dise? ton guide, c'est un escroc I hate to say it, but the guide is a crook; je ne voudrais pas vous déranger I don't want to put you out; sans vouloir te vexer, ton chapeau est un peu voyant without wanting to sound rude, your hat is a bit garish; sans le vouloir [bousculer, révéler] by accident; [se retrouver] accidentally; il m'a fait mal sans le vouloir he hurt me unintentionally ou without meaning to; viens quand tu veux come whenever you want ou like; fais comme tu veux, mais ne me dérange pas tout le temps! do what you like ou want, but don't keep bothering me all the time!; ‘qu'est-ce qu'on fait ce soir?’-‘comme tu veux or voudras’ ‘what shall we do tonight?’-‘whatever you like, it's up to you’; que tu le veuilles ou non whether you like it or not; elle fait ce qu'elle veut de son mari she twists her husband around her little finger; elle fait ce qu'elle veut de ses mains she can do anything with her hands; je ne vous veux aucun mal I don't wish you any harm; tu ne veux/voudrais pas me faire croire que you're not telling/trying to tell me that; après ce qu'il a fait, tu voudrais que je lui fasse confiance? do you expect me to trust him after what he's done?; comment voulez-vous qu'on travaille dans ces conditions? how do you expect people to work in these conditions?; que veux-tu que j'y fasse? what do you want ou expect me to do about it?; que veux-tu que je te dise? c'est de ta faute! what do you expect me to say? it's your fault!; comment veux-tu qu'elle résiste? how could she resist?; comment veux-tu que je le sache? how should I know?; pourquoi voudrais-tu qu'il refuse? why should he refuse?; c'est la vie, que voulez-vous! what can you do, that's life!; que veux-tu, on n'y peut rien! what can you do, it's hopeless!; j'aurais voulu t'y voir○! I'd like to have seen you in the same position!; tu l'auras voulu! it'll be all your own fault!; ⇒ beurre, peau, voilà;
    3 ( accepter) voulez-vous (bien) fermer la fenêtre/me prêter votre stylo? would you mind closing the window/lending me your pen?; vous voudrez bien renvoyer le formulaire please return the form; tu voudras bien leur transmettre ce message will you please give them this message; voudriez-vous avoir l'obligeance de faire fml would you be so kind as to do; demander à or prier qn de bien vouloir faire fml to ask sb to be so kind as to do, to ask sb kindly to do sout; on voudra bien se référer aux ouvrages suivants please refer to the following works; voudrais-tu aller m'acheter le journal, s'il te plaît would you go and buy me the paper, please; voulez-vous or veuillez répéter votre question, s'il vous plaît would you repeat your question please; veuillez patienter ( au téléphone) please hold the line; si vous le voulez bien, nous commencerons sans lui if you don't mind, we'll start without him; si vous voulez bien me suivre if you'd like to follow me; si vous voulez bien de moi comme quatrième au bridge if you'll have me as a fourth at bridge; veux-tu (bien) te taire! will you (please) be quiet!; ils ont bien voulu nous prêter leur voiture they were kind enough to lend us their car; elle a bien voulu leur accorder une entrevue she was kind enough to grant them an interview; nous vous remercions d'avoir bien voulu faire thank you for doing; elle n'a pas voulu signer she would not sign; le bois ne veut pas brûler the wood won't burn; le moteur ne veut pas partir the engine won't start; ma blessure ne veut pas guérir my wound won't heal; tout le monde attendait qu'elle veuille (bien) se montrer everyone was waiting for her to put in an appearance; elle veut bien prendre ce poste à condition d'être mieux payée she's happy to take the job on condition that she's paid more; je veux bien te croire I'm quite prepared to believe you; ( plus réticent) I'd like to believe you; si l'on veut bien admettre/se rappeler que if one accepts/remembers that; il était mieux informé (des faits) qu'il ne veut bien le dire he knew more about it than he's prepared to admit; je veux bien croire que la vie est dure, mais I know life is hard, but; je veux bien qu'il soit malade/qu'ils fassent grève, mais I know he's ill/they're on strike, but; ‘ça s'est bien passé?’-‘si on veut’ ‘did it go well?’-‘so-so○’; ‘ce n'est pas cher/difficile’-‘si on veut!’ ‘it's not expensive/difficult’-‘or so you say!’; ‘c'était plus confortable avant!’-‘si tu veux, mais’ ‘it was more comfortable before!’-‘maybe, but’;
    4 ( signifier) vouloir dire to mean; que veux-tu dire? what do you mean?; qu'est-ce que ça veut dire? ( signification) what does that mean?; ( attitude) what's all this about?; pour moi, ça ne veut rien dire it means nothing to me; et alors, ça veut dire quoi de bousculer les gens comme ça○? hey, what do you mean by pushing people like that?; ça veut tout simplement dire qu'on va payer plus d'impôts it simply means we're going to pay higher taxes; que voulez-vous dire par là? what (exactly) do you mean by that?; tu ne veux pas dire qu'il est médecin? you don't mean to tell me he's a doctor ?; ça voudrait dire tout refaire that would mean doing everything all over again;
    5 ( prétendre) la légende veut que legend has it that; comme le veut la légende/tradition as legend/tradition has it; leur théorie veut que according to their theory; on a voulu voir en lui un pionnier de l'architecture people tended to see him as a pioneering architect.
    C en vouloir vtr ind
    1 ○( être déterminé) to want to get on; il réussira, il en veut! he wants to get on, and he'll succeed!; ce sont de bons élèves/soldats, et qui en veulent they are good students/soldiers who want to get on;
    2 ( garder rancune) en vouloir à qn to bear a grudge against sb; je leur en veux de m'avoir trompé I hold it against them for not being honest with me; ne m 'en veux pas si je remets notre rendez-vous please forgive me if I put off our meeting;
    3 ( avoir des vues sur) en vouloir à qch to be after sth; elle en veut à notre fortune she's after our money.
    D se vouloir vpr
    1 ( prétendre être) [personne] to like to think of oneself as; [ouvrage, théorie, méthode] to be meant to be; ils se veulent pacifistes/rassurants they like to think of themselves as pacifists/as being reassuring; mon livre se veut objectif/à la portée de tous my book is meant to be objective/accessible to all;
    2 ( chercher à être) to try to be; les dirigeants se sont voulus conciliants the leaders tried to be conciliatory;
    3 ( se reprocher) s'en vouloir to be cross with oneself; s'en vouloir de to regret; je m'en veux d'avoir été si dur avec elle/de ne pas l'avoir écoutée I really regret being so hard on her/not listening to her; je m'en serais voulu de ne pas vous avoir prévenu I would never have forgiven myself if I hadn't warned you; il ne faut pas vous en vouloir, ce n'était pas de votre faute! you mustn't blame yourself, it wasn't your fault!
    vouloir c'est pouvoir Prov, quand on veut, on peut where there's a will there's a way; je veux○! you bet○!
    I
    [vulwar] nom masculin
    II
    [vulwar] verbe transitif
    A.[AVOIR POUR BUT]
    1. [être décidé à obtenir] to want
    je le ferai, que tu le veuilles ou non I'll do it, whether you like it or not
    quand elle veut quelque chose, elle le veut! when she's decided she wants something, she's determined (to get it)!
    lui, j'en fais (tout) ce que je veux I've got him eating out of my hand
    elle veut récupérer son enfant/être reçue par le ministre she's determined to get her child back/that the Minister should see her
    arrangez-vous comme vous voulez, mais je veux être livré demain I don't mind how you do it but I insist the goods are delivered tomorrow
    à ton âge, pourquoi vouloir faire le jeune homme? at your age, why do you try to act like a young man?
    vouloir quelque chose de: il veut 45 000 euros de son studio he wants 45,000 euros for his bedsit
    que veux-tu de moi?, qu'est-ce que tu me veux? what do you want from me?
    quand tu veux, tu fais très bien la cuisine you can cook beautifully when you put your mind to it
    vouloir, c'est pouvoir (proverbe) , quand on veut, on peut where there's a will, there's a way (proverbe)
    2. [prétendre - suj: personne] to claim
    3. [avoir l'intention de]
    vouloir faire quelque chose to want ou to intend ou to mean to do something
    sans vouloir me mêler de tes affaires/te contredire... I don't want to interfere/to contradict you but...
    vous voulez dire qu'on l'a tuée? do you mean ou are you suggesting (that) she was killed?
    4. [essayer de]
    vouloir faire to want ou to try to do
    en voulant la sauver, il s'est noyé he drowned in his attempt ou trying to rescue her
    5. [s'attendre à] to expect
    tu voudrais peut-être aussi que je te remercie! you don't expect to be thanked into the bargain, do you?
    que veux-tu que j'y fasse? what do you want me to do about it?, what can I do about it?
    que voulez-vous que je vous dise? what can I say?, what do you want me to say?
    6. (familier) [sexuellement] to want
    B.[PRÉFÉRER, SOUHAITER]
    1. [dans un choix] to want, to wish
    je pourrai revenir? — bien sûr, quand vous voulez! may I come again? — of course, any time ou whenever you want!
    tu peux dessiner une maison si tu veux you could draw a house, if you like
    tu l'as ou l'auras voulu! you asked for it!
    2. [dans une suggestion] to want
    veux-tu de l'aide? do you want ou would you like some help?
    3. [dans un souhait]
    quand tu me parles, je te voudrais un autre ton (soutenu) please don't use that tone when you're talking to me
    aller au match sans avoir rangé ta chambre, je voudrais bien voir ça! (ironique) whatever gave you the idea (that) you could go to the match without tidying up your room first?
    4. [dans une demande polie]
    veuillez avoir l'obligeance de... would you kindly ou please...
    veuillez recevoir, Monsieur, mes salutations distinguées yours sincerely (UK) ou truly (US)
    veuillez vous retirer, Marie you may go now, Marie
    5. [dans un rappel à l'ordre]
    ne m'interromps pas, tu veux!, veuille bien ne pas m'interrompre! will you please not interrupt me?, would you mind not interrupting me?
    un peu de respect, tu veux (bien) a bit less cheek, if you don't mind!
    C.[SUJET: CHOSE]
    1. [se prêter à, être en état de]
    2. [exiger] to require
    la tradition voulait que... it was a tradition that...
    la dignité de notre profession veut que... the dignity of our profession demands that...
    [prétendre]
    3. [déterminer - suj: destin, hasard, malheur]
    la chance a voulu que... as luck would have it...
    le calendrier a voulu que cela tombe un lundi it fell on a Monday, as it so happened
    4. [s'efforcer de]
    le décor veut évoquer une ferme normande the decor strives ou tries to suggest a Normandy farmhouse
    5.
    a. [avoir comme sens propre] to mean
    b. [avoir comme implication] to mean, to suggest
    tu vas m'obéir, non mais, qu'est-ce que ça veut dire? (familier) for goodness's sake will you do as I say!
    D.[LOCUTIONS] [consenti, accepter]
    bien vouloir: bien vouloir faire quelque chose to be willing ou to be prepared ou to be quite happy to do something
    je veux bien être patient, mais il y a des limites! I can be patient, but there are limits!
    un petit café? — oui, je veux bien fancy a coffee? — yes please
    poussons jusqu'à la prochaine ville — moi je veux bien, mais il est tard! let's go on to the next town — I don't mind, but it is late!
    bien vouloir [admettre]: je veux bien qu'il y ait des restrictions budgétaires mais... I understand (that) there are cuts in the budget but...
    je veux bien avoir des défauts, mais pas celui-là granted, I have some shortcomings, but that isn't one of them
    il a dit nous avoir soutenus, moi je veux bien, mais le résultat est là! he said he supported us, OK ou and that may be so, but look at the result!
    que veux-tu, que voulez-vous: c'est ainsi, que voulez-vous! that's just the way it is!
    j'accepte ses humeurs, que veux-tu! I (just) put up with his moods, what can I do?
    si tu veux, si vous voulez more or less, if you like
    ————————
    vouloir de verbe plus préposition
    1. [être prêt à accepter]
    vouloir de quelqu'un/quelque chose to want somebody/something
    a. [elle a de l'ambition] she wants to make it ou to win
    b. [elle a de l'application] she's dead keen
    en vouloir à quelqu'un [éprouver de la rancune] to bear ou to have a grudge against somebody
    je ne l'ai pas fait exprès, ne m'en veux pas I didn't do it on purpose, don't be cross with me
    décidément, ton chien m'en veut your dog's definitely got something against me
    en vouloir à quelqu'un/quelque chose [le convoiter]: elle en veut à ma fortune she's after my money
    qui peut en vouloir à ma vie/réputation? who could wish me dead/would want to damage my reputation?
    ————————
    se vouloir verbe pronominal intransitif
    le livre se veut une satire de l'aristocratie allemande the book claims ou is supposed to be a satire on the German aristocracy
    ————————
    s'en vouloir verbe pronominal
    (emploi réfléchi) to be angry ou annoyed with oneself
    ————————
    s'en vouloir verbe pronominal
    en veux-tu en voilà locution adverbiale
    (familier) [en abondance]
    ————————
    si l'on veut locution adverbiale
    1. [approximativement] if you like
    2. [pour exprimer une réserve]
    il est fidèle... si l'on veut! he's faithful... after a fashion!

    Dictionnaire Français-Anglais > vouloir

  • 88 hang

    [hæŋ]
    past tense, past participle - hung; verb
    1) (to put or fix, or to be put or fixed, above the ground eg by a hook: We'll hang the picture on that wall; The picture is hanging on the wall.) obesiti, viseti
    2) (to fasten (something), or to be fastened, at the top or side so that it can move freely but cannot fall: A door hangs by its hinges.) obesiti, biti obešen
    3) ((past tense, past participle hanged) to kill, or to be killed, by having a rope put round the neck and being allowed to drop: Murderers used to be hanged in the United Kingdom, but no-one hangs for murder now.) obesiti, biti obešen
    4) ((often with down or out) to be bending, drooping or falling downwards: The dog's tongue was hanging out; Her hair was hanging down.) viseti
    5) (to bow (one's head): He hung his head in shame.) pobesiti
    •
    - hanging
    - hangings
    - hangman
    - hangover
    - get the hang of
    - hang about/around
    - hang back
    - hang in the balance
    - hang on
    - hang together
    - hang up
    * * *
    I [hæŋ]
    noun
    način kako tkanina (stvar) visi ali pada; način dela; padec, strmec, pobočje; kratek premor; colloquially pomen
    to get ( —ali see) the hang of a thing — dojeti bistvo česa, razumeti kaj
    II [hæŋ]
    1.
    transitive verb
    obesiti, obešati; pobesiti, pobešati (glavo); obesiti (sliko), nalepiti (tapete);
    2.
    intransitive verb
    viseti, biti obešen, obesiti se; nagniti se, lebdeti; obotavljati se (tudi žoga pri športu); American juridically ovirati porotnike pri odločitvi
    hang it (all)! — naj gre k vragu!
    I'll be hanged first! — prej se dam obesiti!
    I'll be hanged if — vrag naj me vzame, če
    well, I'm hanged! — kaj takega!, vrag naj me pocitra!
    to hang by a hair ( —ali rope, single thread) — figuratively viseti na nitki
    to hang in doubt — biti negotov, kolebati
    to hang fire — prepozno (se) sprožiti (puška); figuratively biti počasen, neodločen, omahovati, obotavljati se
    to hang o.s. — obesiti se
    to let things go hang — pustiti, da gre vse k vragu; pustiti stvari pri miru
    sleep hangs on my eyelids — veke so mi težke, oči mi lezejo skupaj
    time hangs heavy on my hands — ne vem, kaj naj počnem s časom, predolgo mi traja, vleče se

    English-Slovenian dictionary > hang

  • 89 BERA

    * * *
    I)
    (ber; bar, bárum; borinn), v.
    I.
    1) to bear, carry, convey (bar B. biskup í börum suðr í Hvamm);
    bera (farm) af skipi, to unload a ship;
    bera (mat) af borði, to take (the meat) off the table;
    bera e-t á hesti, to carry on horseback;
    2) to wear (bera klæði, vápn, kórónu);
    bera œgishjálm, to inspire fear and awe;
    3) to bear, produce, yield (jörðin berr gras; tré bera aldin, epli);
    4) to bear, give birth to, esp. of sheep and cows;
    kýr hafði borit kálf, had calved;
    absol., ván at hón mundi bera, that the cow would calve;
    the pp. is used of men; hann hafði verit blindr borinn, born blind;
    verða borinn í þenna heim, to be born into this world;
    þann sóma, sem ek em til borinn, born to;
    borinn e-m, frá e-m (rare), born of;
    Nótt var Nörvi borin, was the daughter of N.;
    borinn Sigmundi, son of S.;
    5) bera e-n afli, ofrafli, ofrliði, ofrmagni, ofríki, to bear one down, overcome, oppress, one by odds or superior force;
    bera e-n ráðum, to overrule one;
    bera e-n bjóri, to make drunk with beer;
    verða bráðum borinn, to be taken by surprise;
    borinn verkjum, overcome by pains;
    þess er borin ván, there is no hope, all hope is gone;
    borinn baugum, bribed; cf. bera fé á e-n, to bribe one;
    6) to lear, be capable of bearing (of a ship, horse, vehicle);
    þeir hlóðu bæði skipin sem borð báru, with as much as they could carry;
    fig., to sustain, support (svá mikill mannfjöldi, at landit fekk eigi borit);
    of persons, to bear up against, endure, support (grief, sorrow, etc.);
    absol., bar hann drengiliga, he bore it manfully;
    similarly, bera (harm) af sér, berast vel (illa, lítt) af;
    bar hon sköruliga af sér, she bore up bravely;
    hversu berst Auðr af um bróðurdauðann, how does she bear it?
    hon berst af lítt, she is much cast down;
    bera sik vel upp, to bear well up against;
    7) bera e-t á, e-n á hendr e-m, to charge or tax one with (eigi erum vér þess valdir, er þú berr á oss);
    bera (kvið) á e-n, to give a verdict against, declare guilty (í annat sinn báru þeir á Flosa kviðinn);
    bera af e-m (kviðinn), to give a verdict for;
    bera e-t af sér, to deny having done a thing;
    bera or bera vitni, vætti, to bear witness, testify;
    bera or bera um e-t, to give a verdict in a case;
    bera e-n sannan at sök, to prove guilty by evidence;
    bera e-n undan sök, to acquit;
    bera í sundr frændsemi þeirra, to prove (by evidence) that they are not relations;
    refl. (pass.), berast, to be proved by evidence (þótt þér berist þat faðerni, er þú segir);
    8) to set forth, report, tell;
    bera e-m kveðju (orð, orðsending), to bring one a greeting, compliments (word, message);
    bera or bera fram erindi sín fyrir e-n, to state (tell) one’s errand or to plead one’s case before one;
    bera e-m njósn, to apprise one;
    bera e-t upp, to produce, mention, tell;
    bera upp erindi sín, to state one’s errand;
    bera saman ráð sín, to consult together;
    eyddist það ráð, er þeir báru saman, which they had designed;
    9) to keep, hold, bear, of a title (bera jarlnafn, konnungsnafn);
    bera (eigi) giptu, gæfu, hammingju, auðnu til e-s, (not) to have the good fortune to do a thing (bar hann enga gæfu til at þjóna þér);
    bera vit, skyn, kunnáttu á e-t, to have knowledge of, uniderstanding about;
    bera hug, áræði, þor, traust til e-s, to have courage, confidence to do a thing;
    bera áhyggju fyrir e-u, to be concerned about;
    bera ást, elsku, hatr til e-s, to bear affection, love, hatred to;
    10) to bear off or away, carry off (some gain);
    bera sigr af e-m, af e-u, to carry off the victory from or in;
    hann hafði borit sigr af tveim orustum, he had been victorious in two battles;
    bera hærra (lægra) hlut to get the best (the worst) of it;
    bera efra (hærra) skjöld, to gain the victory;
    bera hátt (lágt) höfuðit, to bear the head high (low), to be in high (low) spirits;
    bera halann bratt, lágt, to cock up or let fall the tail, to be in high or low spirits;
    11) with preps.:
    bera af e-m, to surpass;
    en þó bar Bolli af, surpassed all the rest;
    bera af sér högg, lag to ward off, parry a blow or thrust;
    bera eld at, to set fire to;
    bera fjötur (bönd) at e-m, to put fetters (bonds) on one;
    bera á or í, to smear, anoint (bera vatn í augu sér, bera tjöru í höfuð sér);
    bera e-t til, to apply to, to try if it fits (bera til hvern lykil af öðrum at portinu);
    bera e-t um, to wind round;
    þá bar hann þá festi um sik, made it fast round his body;
    bera um með e-n, to bear with, have patience with;
    bera út barn, to expose a child;
    12) refl., berast mikit (lítit) á, to bear oneself proudly (humbly);
    láta af berast, to die;
    láta fyrir berast e-s staðar, to stay, remain in a place (for shelter);
    berast e-t fyrir, to design a thing (barst hann þat fyrir at sjá aldregi konur);
    at njósna um, hvat hann bærist fyrir, to inquire into what he was about;
    berast vápn á, to attack one another;
    berast at or til, to happen;
    þat barst at (happened) á einhverju sumri;
    ef svá harðliga kann til at berast, if that misfortune does happen;
    berast í móti, to happen, occur;
    hefir þetta vel í móti borizt, it is a happy coincidence;
    berast við, to be prevented;
    ok nú lét almáttugr guð við berast kirkjubrunann, prevented, stopped the burning of the church;
    II. impers., denoting a sort of passive or involuntary motion;
    alla berr at sama brunni, all come to the same well (end);
    bar hann (acc.) þá ofan gegnt Ösuri, he happened to come down just opposite to Ö.;
    esp. of ships and sailors; berr oss (acc.) til Íslands eða annarra landa, we drift to Iceland or other countries;
    þá (acc.) bar suðr í haf, they were carried out southwards;
    Skarpheðin (acc.) bar nú at þeim, S. came suddenly upon them;
    ef hann (acc.) skyldi bera þar at, if he should happen to come there;
    e-n berr yfir, one is borne onwards, of a bird flying, a man riding;
    hann (acc.) bar skjótt yfir, it passed quickly (of a flying meteor);
    2) followed by preps.:
    Gunnar sér, at rauðan kyrtil bar við glugginn, that a red kirtle passed before the window;
    hvergi bar skugga (acc.) á, there was nowhere a shadow;
    e-t berr fram (hátt), is prominent;
    Ólafr konungr stóð í lyptingu ok bar hann (acc.) hátt mjök, stood out conspicuously;
    e-t berr á milli, comes between;
    leiti (acc.) bar á milli, a hill hid the prospect;
    fig. e-m berr e-t á milli, they are at variance about a thing;
    mart (acc.) berr nú fyrir augu mér, many things come now before my eyes;
    veiði (acc.) berr í hendr e-m, game falls to one’s lot;
    e-t berr undan, goes amiss, fails;
    bera saman, to coincide;
    bar nöfn þeirra saman, they had the same name;
    fig., with dat.; bar öllum sögum vel saman, all the stories agreed well together;
    fund várn bar saman, we met;
    3) bera at, til, við, at hendi, til handa, to befall, happen, with dat. of the person;
    svá bar at einn vetr, it happened one winter;
    þó at þetta vandræði (acc.) hafi nú borit oss (dat.) at hendi, has befallen us;
    bar honum svá til, it so befell him;
    þat bar við (it so happened), at Högni kom;
    raun (acc.) berr á, it is proved by fact;
    4) of time, to fall upon;
    ef þing (acc.) berr á hina helgu viku, if the parliament falls in the holy week;
    bera í móti, to coincide, happen exactly at the same time;
    5) denoting cause;
    e-t berr til, causes a thing;
    konungr spurði, hvat til bæri úgleði hans, what was the cause of his grief;
    ætluðu þat þá allir, at þat mundi til bera, that that was the reason;
    berr e-m nauðsyn til e-s, one is obliged to do a thing;
    6) e-t berr undir e-n, falls to a person’s lot;
    hon á arf at taka, þegar er undir hana berr, in her turn;
    e-t berr frá, is surpassing;
    er sagt, at þat (acc.) bæri frá, hvé vel þeir mæltu, it was extraordinary how well they spoke;
    7) e-t berr bráðum, happens of a sudden;
    e-t berr stóru, stórum (stœrrum), it amounts to much (more), it matters a great deal (more), it is of great (greater) importance;
    8) absol. or with an adv., vel, illa, with infin.;
    e-m berr (vel, illa) at gera e-t, it becomes, beseems one (well, ill) to do a thing (berr yðr vel, herra, at sjá sannindi á þessu máli);
    used absol., berr vel, illa, it is beseeming, proper, fit, or unbeseeming, improper, unfit (þat þykkir eigi illa bera, at).
    (að), v. to make bare (hon beraði likam sinn).
    * * *
    1.
    u, f.
    I. [björn], a she-bear, Lat. ursa; the primitive root ‘ber’ remains only in this word (cp. berserkr and berfjall), björn (q. v.) being the masc. in use, Landn. 176, Fas. i. 367, Vkv. 9: in many Icel. local names, Beru-fjörðr, -vík, from Polar bears; fem. names, Bera, Hallbera, etc., Landn.
    II. a shield, poët., the proverb, baugr er á beru sæmstr, to a shield fits best a baugr (q. v.), Lex. Poët., Edda (Gl.); hence names of poems Beru-drápa, Eg.
    2.
    bar, báru, borit, pres. berr,—poët. forms with the suffixed negative; 3rd pers. sing. pres. Indic. berrat, Hm. 10; 3rd pers. sing. pret. barat, Vellekla; 1st pers. sing. barkak, Eb. 62 (in a verse); barkat ek, Hs. 8; 2nd pers. sing. bartattu; 3rd pers. pl. bárut, etc., v. Lex. Poët. [Gr. φέρειν; Lat. ferre; Ulf. bairan; A. S. beran; Germ. gebären; Engl. bear; Swed. bära; Dan. bære].
    A. Lat. ferre, portare:
    I. prop. with a sense of motion, to bear, carry, by means of the body, of animals, of vehicles, etc., with acc., Egil tók mjöðdrekku eina mikla, ok bar undir hendi sér, Eg. 237; bar hann heim hrís, Rm. 9; konungr lét bera inn kistur tvær, báru tveir menn hverja, Eg. 310; bera farm af skipi, to unload a ship, Ld. 32; bera (farm) á skip, to load a ship, Nj. 182; tóku alla ösku ok báru á á ( amnem) út, 623, 36; ok bar þat ( carried it) í kerald, 43, K. Þ. K. 92; b. mat á borð, í stofu, to put the meat on table, in the oven; b. mat af borði, to take it off table, Eb. 36, 266, Nj. 75, Fms. ix. 219, etc.
    2. Lat. gestare, ferre, denoting to wear clothes, to carry weapons; skikkja dýr er konungr hafði borit, Eg. 318; b. kórónu, to wear the crown, Fms. x. 16; atgeir, Nj. 119; vápn, 209: metaph., b. ægishjálm, to inspire fear and awe; b. merki, to carry the flag in a battle, Nj. 274, Orkn. 28, 30, 38, Fms. v. 64, vi. 413; bera fram merki, to advance, move in a battle, vi. 406.
    3. b. e-t á hesti (áburðr), to carry on horseback; Auðunn bar mat á hesti, Grett. 107; ok bar hrís á hesti, 76 new Ed.; þeir báru á sjau hestum, 98 new Ed.
    II. without a sense of motion:
    1. to give birth to; [the root of barn, bairn; byrja, incipere; burðr, partus; and burr, filius: cp. Lat. parĕre; also Gr. φέρειν, Lat. ferre, of child-bearing.] In Icel. prose, old as well as mod., ‘ala’ and ‘fæða’ are used of women; but ‘bera,’ of cows and sheep; hence sauðburðr, casting of lambs, kýrburðr; a cow is snembær, siðbær, Jólabær, calves early, late, at Yule time, etc.; var ekki ván at hon ( the cow) mundi b. fyr en um várit, Bs. i. 193, 194; kýr hafði borit kálf, Bjarn. 32; bar hvárrtveggi sauðrinn sinn burð, Stj. 178: the participle borinn is used of men in a great many compds in a general sense, aptrborinn, árborinn, endrborinn, frjálsborinn, goðborinn, höldborinn, hersborinn, konungborinn, óðalborinn, samborinn, sundrborinn, velborinn, úborinn, þrælborinn, etc.; also out of compds, mun ek eigi upp gefa þann sóma, sem ek em til borinn, … entitled to by inheritance, Ld. 102; hann hafði blindr verit borinn, born blind, Nj. 152, Hdl. 34, 42, Vsp. 2: esp. borinn e-m, born of one, Rm. 39, Hdl. 12, 23, 27, Hðm. 2, Gs. 9, Vþm. 25, Stor. 16, Vkv. 15; borinn frá e-m, Hdl. 24: the other tenses are in theol. Prose used of Christ, hans blezaða son er virðist at láta berast hingað í heim af sinni blezaðri móður, Fms. i. 281; otherwise only in poetry, eina dóttur (acc.) berr álfröðull (viz. the sun, regarded as the mother), Vþm. 47; hann Gjálp um bar, hann Greip um bar …, Hdl. 36: borit (sup.), Hkv. 1. 1.
    β. of trees, flowers; b. ávöxt, blóm …, to bear fruit, flower … (freq.); bar aldinviðrinn tvennan blóma, Fms. ix. 265; cp. the phrase, bera sitt barr, v. barr.
    2. denoting to load, with acc. of the person and dat. of the thing:
    α. in prop. sense; hann hafði borit sik mjök vápnum, he had loaded himself with arms, i. e. wore heavy armour, Sturl. iii. 250.
    β. but mostly in a metaph. sense; b. e-n ofrafli, ofrmagni, ofrliði, ofríki, magni, to bear one down, to overcome, oppress one, by odds or superior force, Grág. i. 101, ii. 195, Nj. 80, Hkr. ii. 371, Gþl. 474, Stj. 512, Fms. iii. 175 (in the last passage a dat. pers. badly); b. e-n ráðum, to overrule one, Nj. 198, Ld. 296; b. e-n málum, to bearhim down (wrongfully) in a lawsuit, Nj. 151; b. e-n bjóri, to make drunk, Vkv. 26: medic., borinn verkjum, sótt, Bjarn. 68, Og. 5; bölvi, Gg. 2: borne down, feeling heavy pains; þess er borin ván, no hope, all hope is gone, Ld. 250; borinn sök, charged with a cause, Fms. v. 324, H. E. i. 561; bráðum borinn, to be taken by surprise, Fms. iv. 111; b. fé, gull á e-n, to bring one a fee, gold, i. e. to bribe one, Nj. 62; borinn baugum, bribed, Alvm. 5; always in a bad sense, cp. the law phrase, b. fé í dóm, to bribe a court, Grág., Nj. 240.
    3. to bear, support, sustain, Lat. sustinere, lolerare, ferre:
    α. properly, of a ship, horse, vehicle, to bear, be capable of bearing; þeir hlóðu bæði skipin sem borð báru, all that they could carry, Eb. 302;—a ship ‘berr’ ( carries) such and such a weight; but ‘tekr’ ( takes) denotes a measure of fluids.
    β. metaph. to sustain, support; dreif þannig svá mikill mannfjöldi at landit fékk eigi borit, Hkr. i. 56; but metaph. to bear up against, endure, support grief, sorrow, etc., sýndist öllum at Guð hefði nær ætlað hvat hann mundi b. mega, Bs. i. 139; biðr hann friðar ok þykist ekki mega b. reiði hans, Fms. iii. 80: the phrase, b. harm sinn í hljóði, to suffer silently; b. svívirðing, x. 333: absol., þótti honum mikit víg Kjartans, en þó bar hann drengilega, he bore it manfully, Ld. 226; er þat úvizka, at b. eigi slíkt, not to bear or put up with, Glúm. 327; b. harm, to grieve, Fms. xi. 425: in the phrases, b. sik, b. af sér, berask, berask vel (illa, lítt), to bear oneself, to bear up against misfortune; Guðrúnu þótti mikit fráfall Þorkels, en þó bar hon sköruliga af sér, she bore her bravely up, Ld. 326–328; lézt hafa spurt at ekkjan bæri vel af sér harmana, Eb. 88; berask af; hversu bersk Auðr af um bróðurdauðann? (how does she bear it?); hón bersk af lítt ( she is much borne down) ok þykir mikit, Gísl. 24; niun oss vandara gört en öðrum at vér berim oss vel (Lat. fortiter ferre), Nj. 197; engi maðr hefði þar jamvel borit sik, none bad borne himself so boldly, Sturl. iii. 132; b. sik vel upp, to bear well up against, bear a stout heart, Hrafn. 17; b. sik beiskliga ( sorely), Stj. 143; b. sik lítt, to be downcast, Fms. ii. 61; b. sik at göra e-t, to do one’s best, try a thing.
    III. in law terms or modes of procedure:
    1. bera járn, the ordeal of bearing hot iron in the hand, cp. járnburðr, skírsla. This custom was introduced into Scandinavia together with Christianity from Germany and England, and superseded the old heathen ordeals ‘hólmganga,’ and ‘ganga undir jarðarmen,’ v. this word. In Norway, during the civil wars, it was esp. used in proof of paternity of the various pretenders to the crown, Fms. vii. 164, 200, ix. Hák. S. ch. 14, 41–45, viii. (Sverr. S.) ch. 150, xi. (Jómsv. S.) ch. 11, Grett. ch. 41, cp. N. G. L. i. 145, 389. Trial by ordeal was abolished in Norway A. D. 1247. In Icel. It was very rarely mentioned, vide however Lv. ch. 23 (paternity), twice or thrice in the Sturl. i. 56, 65, 147, and Grág. i. 341, 361; it seems to have been very seldom used there, (the passage in Grett. S. l. c. refers to Norway.)
    2. bera út (hence útburðr, q. v.), to expose children; on this heathen custom, vide Grimm R. A. In heathen Icel., as in other parts of heathen Scandinavia, it was a lawful act, but seldom exercised; the chief passages on record are, Gunnl. S. ch. 3 (ok þat var þá siðvandi nokkurr, er land var allt alheiðit, at þeir menn er félitlir vórn, en stóð ómegð mjök til handa létu út bera börn sín, ok þótti þó illa gört ávalt), Fs. Vd. ch. 37, Harð. S. ch. 8, Rd. ch. 7, Landn. v. ch. 6, Finnb. ch. 2, Þorst. Uxaf. ch. 4, Hervar. S. ch. 4, Fas. i. 547 (a romance); cp. Jómsv. S. ch. 1. On the introduction of Christianity into Icel. A. D. 1000, it was resolved that, in regard to eating of horse-flesh and exposure of children, the old laws should remain in force, Íb. ch. 9; as Grimm remarks, the exposure must take place immediately after birth, before the child had tasted food of any kind whatever, and before it was besprinkled with water (ausa vatni) or shown to the father, who had to fix its name; exposure, after any of these acts, was murder, cp. the story of Liafburga told by Grimm R. A.); v. Also a Latin essay at the end of the Gunnl. S. (Ed. 1775). The Christian Jus Eccl. put an end to this heathen barbarism by stating at its very beginning, ala skal barn hvert er borit verðr, i. e. all children, if not of monstrous shape, shall be brought up, N. G. L. i. 339, 363.
    β. b. út (now more usual, hefja út, Am. 100), to carry out for burial; vera erfðr ok tit borinn, Odd. 20; var hann heygðr, ok út borinn at fornum sið, Fb. i. 123; b. á bál, to place (the body and treasures) upon the pile, the mode of burying in the old heathen time, Fas. i. 487 (in a verse); var hon borin á bálit ok slegit í eldi, Edda 38.
    B. Various and metaph. cases.
    I. denoting motion:
    1. ‘bera’ is in the Grág. the standing law term for delivery of a verdict by a jury (búar), either ‘bera’ absol. or adding kvið ( verdict); bera á e-n, or b. kvið á e-n, to give a verdict against, declare guilty; bera af e-m, or b. af e-m kviðinn, to give a verdict for; or generally, bera, or b. um e-t, to give a verdict in a case; bera, or b. vitni, vætti, also simply means to testify, to witness, Nj. 111, cp. kviðburðr ( delivering of verdict), vitnisburðr ( bearing witness), Grág. ii. 28; eigi eigu búar ( jurors) enn at b. um þat hvat lög eru á landi hér, the jurors have not to give verdict in (to decide) what is law in the country, cp. the Engl. maxim, that jurors have only to decide the question of evidence, not of law, Grág. (Kb.) ch. 85; eigi eru búar skildir at b. um hvatvetna; um engi mál eigu þeir at skilja, þau er erlendis ( abroad) hafa görzt, id.; the form in delivering the verdict—höfum vér ( the jurors), orðit á eitt sáttir, berum á kviðburðinn, berum hann sannan at sökinni, Nj. 238, Grág. i. 49, 22, 138, etc.; í annat sinn báru þeir á Flosa kviðinn, id.; b. annattveggja af eðr á; b. undan, to discharge, Nj. 135; b. kvið í hag ( for), Grág. i. 55; b. lýsingar vætti, Nj. 87; b. vitni ok vætti, 28, 43, 44; b. ljúgvitni, to bear false witness, Grág. i. 28; b. orð, to bear witness to a speech, 43; bera frændsemi sundr, to prove that they are not relations, N. G. L. i. 147: reflex., berask ór vætti, to prove that oneself is wrongly summoned to bear witness or to give a verdict, 44: berask in a pass. sense, to be proved by evidence, ef vanefni b. þess manns er á hönd var lýst, Grág. i. 257; nema jafnmæli berisk, 229; þótt þér berisk þat faðerni er þú segir, Fms. vii. 164; hann kvaðst ætla, at honum mundi berask, that he would be able to get evidence for, Fs. 46.
    β. gener. and not as a law term; b. á, b. á hendr, to charge; b. e-n undan, to discharge, Fs. 95; eigi erum vér þessa valdir er þú berr á oss, Nj. 238, Ld. 206, Fms. iv. 380, xi. 251, Th. 78; b. e-m á brýnn, to throw in one’s face, to accuse, Greg. 51; b. af sér, to deny; eigi mun ek af mér b., at… ( non diffitebor), Nj. 271; b. e-m gott vitni, to give one a good…, 11; b. e-m vel (illa) söguna, to bear favourable (unfavourable) witness of one, 271.
    2. to bear by word of mouth, report, tell, Lat. referre; either absol. or adding kveðju, orð, orðsending, eyrindi, boð, sögu, njósn, frétt…, or by adding a prep., b. fram, frá, upp, fyrir; b. kveðju, to bring a greeting, compliment, Eg. 127; b. erindi (sín) fyrir e-n, to plead one’s case before one, or to tell one’s errand, 472, 473; b. njósn, to apprise, Nj. 131; b. fram, to deliver (a speech), talaði jungherra Magnús hit fyrsta erindi (M. made his first speech in public), ok fanst mönnum mikit um hversu úbernsliga fram var borit, Fms. x. 53; (in mod. usage, b. fram denotes gramm. to pronounce, hence ‘framburðr,’ pronunciation); mun ek þat nú fram b., I shall now tell, produce it, Ld. 256, Eg. 37; b. frá, to attest, relate with emphasis; má þat frá b., Dropl. 21; b. upp, to produce, mention, tell, þótt slík lygi sé upp borin fyrir hann, though such a lie be told him, Eg. 59; þær (viz. charges) urðu engar upp bornar ( produced) við Rút, Nj. 11; berr Sigtryggr þegar upp erindi sín (cp. Germ. ojfenbaren), 271, Ld. 256; b. upp gátu, to give (propound) a riddle, Stj. 411, Fas. i. 464; b. fyrir, to plead as an excuse; b. saman ráð sín, or the like, to consult, Nj. 91; eyddist þat ráð, er þeir báru saman, which they had designed, Post. 656 A. ii; b. til skripta, to confess (eccl.), of auricular confession, Hom. 124, 655 xx.
    II. in a metaphorical or circumlocutory sense, and without any sense of motion, to keep, hold, bear, of a title; b. nafn, to bear a name, esp. as honour or distinction; tignar nafn, haulds nafn, jarls nafn, lends manns nafn, konungs nafn, bónda nafn, Fms. i. 17, vi. 278, xi. 44, Gþl. 106: in a more metaph. sense, denoting endowments, luck, disposition, or the like, b. (ekki) gæfu, hamingju, auðnu til e-s, to enjoy (enjoy not) good or bad luck, etc.; at Þórólfr mundi eigi allsendis gæfu til b. um vináttu við Harald, Eg. 75, 112, 473, Fms. iv. 164, i. 218; úhamingju, 219; b. vit, skyn, kunnáttu á (yfir) e-t, to bring wit, knowledge, etc., to bear upon a thing, xi. 438, Band. 7; hence vel (illa) viti borinn, well (ill) endowed with wit, Eg. 51; vel hyggjandi borinn, well endowed with reason, Grág. ii; b. hug, traust, áræði, þor, til e-s, to have courage, confidence … to do a thing, Gullþ. 47, Fms. ix. 220, Band. 7; b. áhyggju, önn fyrir, to care, be concerned about, Fms. x. 318; b. ást, elsku til e-s, to bear affection, love to one; b. hatr, to hate: b. svört augu, to have dark eyes, poët., Korm. (in a verse); b. snart hjarta, Hom. 5; vant er þat af sjá hvar hvergi berr hjarta sitt, where he keeps his heart, Orkn. 474; b. gott hjarta, to bear a proud heart, Lex. Poët., etc. etc.; b. skyndi at um e-t, to make speed with a thing, Lat. festinare, Fms. viii. 57.
    2. with some sense of motion, to bear off or away, carry off, gain, in such phrases as, b. sigr af e-m, af e-u, to carry off the victory from or in …; hann hafði borit sigr af tveim orrustum, er frægstar hafa verit, he had borne off the victory in two battles, Fms. xi. 186; bera banaorð af e-m, to slay one in a fight, to be the victor; Þorr berr banaorð af Miðgarðsormi, Edda 42, Fms. x. 400: it seems properly to mean, to bear off the fame of having killed a man; verðat svá rík sköp, at Regin skyli mitt banorð bera, Fm. 39; b. hærra, lægra hlut, ‘to bear off the higher or the lower lot,’ i. e. to get the best or the worst of it, or the metaphor is taken from a sortilege, Fms. ii. 268, i. 59, vi. 412; b. efra, hærra skjöld, to carry the highest shield, to get the victory, x. 394, Lex. Poët.; b. hátt (lágt) höfuðit, to bear the head high (low), i. e. to be in high or low spirits, Nj. 91; but also, b. halann bratt (lágt), to cock up or let fall the tail (metaph. from cattle), to be in an exultant or low mood: sundry phrases, as, b. bein, to rest the bones, be buried; far þú til Íslands, þar mun þér auðið verða beinin at b., Grett. 91 A; en þó hygg ek at þú munir hér b. beinin í Norðrálfunni, Orkn. 142; b. fyrir borð, to throw overboard, metaph. to oppress; verðr Þórhalli nú fyrir borð borinn, Th. was defied, set at naught, Fær. 234; b. brjóst fyrir e-m, to be the breast-shield, protection of one, Fms. vii. 263: also, b. hönd fyrir höfuð sér, metaph. to put one’s hand before one’s head, i. e. to defend oneself; b. ægishjálm yfir e-m, to keep one in awe and submission, Fm. 16, vide A. I. 2.
    III. connected with prepp., b. af, and (rarely) yfir (cp. afburðr, yfirburðr), to excel, surpass; eigi sá hvárttveggja féit er af öðrum berr, who gets the best of it, Nj. 15; en þó bar Bolli af, B. surpassed all the rest, Ld. 330; þat mannval bar eigi minnr af öðrum mönnum um fríðleik, afi ok fræknleik, en Ormrinn Langi af öðrum skipum, Fms. ii. 252; at hinn útlendi skal yfir b. ( outdo) þann sem Enskir kalla meistara, xi. 431: b. til, to apply, try if it fits; en er þeir báru til (viz. shoes to the hoof of a horse), þá var sem hæfði hestinum, ix. 55; bera til hvern lykil at öðrum at portinu, Thom. 141; b. e-t við, to try it on (hence viðburðr, experiment, effort): b. um, to wind round, as a cable round a pole or the like, Nj. 115; þá bar hann þá festi um sik, made it fast round his body, Fms. ix. 219; ‘b. e-t undir e-n’ is to consult one, ellipt., b. undir dóm e-s; ‘b. e-t fyrir’ is to feign, use as excuse: b. á, í, to smear, anoint; b. vatn í augu sér, Rb. 354; b. tjöru í höfuð sér, Nj. 181, Hom. 70, 73, cp. áburðr; b. gull, silfr, á, to ornament with gold or silver, Ld. 114, Finnb. 258: is now also used = to dung, b. á völl; b. vápn á e-n, to attack one with sharp weapons, Eg. 583, Fms. xi. 334: b. eld at, to set fire to, Nj. 122; b. fjötur (bönd) at e-m, to put fetters (bonds) on one, Fms. x. 172, Hm. 150: metaph. reflex., bönd berask at e-m, a law term, the evidence bears against one; b. af sér, to parry off; Gyrðr berr af sér lagit, G. parries the thrust off, Fms. x. 421; cp. A. II. 3. β.
    IV. reflex., berask mikit á (cp. áburðr), to bear oneself proudly, or b. lítið á, to bear oneself humbly; hann var hinn kátasti ok barst á mikit, Fms. ii. 68, viii. 219, Eb. 258; b. lítið á, Clem. 35; láta af berask, to die; Óttarr vill skipa til um fjárfar sitt áðr hann láti af b., Fms. ii. 12: berask fyrir, to abide in a place as an asylum, seek shelter; hér munu vit láta fyrir b., Fas. iii. 471; berask e-t fyrir, to design a thing, be busy about, barsk hann þat fyrir at sjá aldregi konur, Greg. 53; at njósna um hvat hann bærist fyrir, to inquire into what he was about, Fms. iv. 184, Vígl. 19.
    β. recipr. in the phrase, berask banaspjót eptir, to seek for one another’s life, Glúm. 354: b. vápn á, of a mutual attack with sharp weapons, Fms. viii. 53.
    γ. pass., sár berask á e-n, of one in the heat of battle beginning to get wounds and give way, Nj.:—berask við, to be prevented, not to do; ok nú lét Almáttugr Guð við berast kirkjubrunnann, stopped, prevented the burning of the church, Fms. v. 144; en mér þætti gott ef við bærist, svá at hón kæmi eigi til þín, vi. 210, vii. 219; ok var þá búit at hann mundi þegar láta hamarinn skjanna honum, en hann lét þat við berask, he bethought himself and did not, Edda 35; því at mönnum þótti sem þannig mundi helzt úhæfa við berask, that mischief would thus be best prevented, Sturl. ii. 6, iii. 80.
    C. IMPERS.:—with a sort of passive sense, both in a loc. and temp. sense, and gener. denotes an involuntary, passive motion, happening suddenly or by chance:
    I. with acc. it bears or carries one to a place, i. e. one happens to come; the proverb, alla (acc.) berr at sama brunni, all come to the same well (end), Lat. omnes una manet nox; bar hann þá ofan gegnt Özuri, he happened to come in his course just opposite to Ö., Lat. delatus est, Dropl. 25: esp. of ships or sailors; nú berr svá til ( happens) herra, at vér komum eigi fram ferðinni, berr oss (acc.) til Íslands eðr annara landa, it bore us to I., i. e. if we drive or drift thither, Fms. iv. 176; þá (acc. pl.) bar suðr í haf, they drifted southwards, Nj. 124.
    β. as a cricketing term, in the phrase, berr (bar) út knöttinn, the ball rolls out, Gísl. 26, cp. p. 110 where it is transit.; berr Gísli ok út knöttinn, vide Vígl. ch. 11, Grett. ch. 17, Vd. ch. 37, Hallfr. S. ch. 2.
    γ. Skarpheðin (acc.) bar nú at þeim, Sk. came suddenly upon them, Nj. 144; bar at Hróaldi þegar allan skjöldinn, the shield was dashed against H.’s body, 198; ok skyldu sæta honum, ef hann (acc.) bæri þar at, if he should per chance come, shew himself there, Orkn. 406; e-n berr yfir, it bears one, i. e. one is borne onwards, as a bird flying, a man riding; þóttist vita, at hann (acc.) mundi fljótara yfir bera ef hann riði en gengi, that he would get on more fleetly riding than walking, Hrafn. 7; hann (acc.) bar skjótt yfir, he passed quickly, of a flying meteor, Nj. 194; e-n berr undan, escapes.
    2. also with acc. followed by prepp. við, saman, jafnframt, hjá, of bodies coinciding or covering one another: loc., er jafnframt ber jaðrana tungls ok sólar, if the orb of the moon and sun cover each other, Rb. 34; þat kann vera stundum, at tunglit (acc.) berr jafht á millum vár ok sólar (i. e. in a moon eclipse), 108; ber nokkut jaðar (acc.) þess hjá sólar jaðri, 34; Gunnarr sér at rauðan kyrtil (acc.) bar við glugginn, G. sees that a red kirtle passed before the window, Nj. 114; bar fyrir utan þat skip vápnaburð (acc.) heiðingja (gen. pl.), the missiles of the heathens passed over the ship without hurting them, flew too high, Fms. vii. 232; hvergi bar skugga (acc.) á, nowhere a shadow, all bright, Nj. 118; þangat sem helzt mátti nokkut yfir þá skugga bera af skóginum, where they were shadowed (hidden) by the trees, Fms. x. 239; e-t berr fram (hátt), a body is prominent, Lat. eminet; Ólafr konungr stóð í lyptingunni, bar hann (acc.) hátt mjök, king O. stood out conspicuously, ii. 308; b. yfir, þótti mjök bera hljóð (acc.) þar yfir er Ólafr sat, the sound was heard over there where O. sat, Sturl. i. 21; b. á milli, something comes between; leiti (acc.) bar á milli, a hill hid the prospect, Nj. 263: metaph., e-m berr e-t á milli, they come to dissent, 13, v. 1.; b. fyrir augu (hence fyrirburðr, vision), of a vision or the like; mart (acc.) berr nú fyrir augu mér, ek sé …, many things come now before my eyes, 104; hann mundi allt þat er fyrir hann hafði borit, i. e. all the dream, 195; eina nótt berr fyrir hann í svefni mikla sýn, Fms. i. 137, Rd. 290; veiði (acc.) berr í hendr e-m (a metaphor from hunting), sport falls to one’s lot; hér bæri veiði í hendr nú, here would be a game, Nj. 252; e-t berr undan (a metaphor from fishing, hunting term), when one misses one’s opportunity; vel væri þá … at þá veiði (acc.) bæri eigi undan, that this game should not go amiss, 69; en ef þetta (acc.) berr undan, if this breaks down, 63; hon bað hann þá drepa einhvern manna hans, heldr en allt (acc.) bæri undan, rather than that all should go amiss, Eg. 258: absol., þyki mér illa, ef undan berr, if I miss it, Nj. 155; viljum vér ekki at undan beri at…, we will by no means miss it…, Fms. viii. 309, v. 1. The passage Bs. i. 416 (en fjárhlutr sá er átt hafði Ari, bar undan Guðmundi) is hardly correct, fjárhlut þann would run better, cp. bera undir, as a law term, below.
    II. adding prepp.; b. við, at, til, at hendi, at móti, til handa …, to befall, happen, Lat. accidere, occurrere, with dat. of the person, (v. atburðr, viðburðr, tilburðr); engi hlut skyldi þann at b., no such thing should happen as…, Fms. xi. 76; svá bar at einn vetr, it befell, x. 201; þat hefir nú víst at hendi borit, er…, Nj. 174; þó þetta vandræði (acc.) hafi nú borit oss (dat.) at hendi, Eg. 7; b. til handa, id., Sks. 327; bar honum svá til, so it befell him, Fms. xi. 425; at honum bæri engan váðaligan hlut til á veginum, that nothing dangerous should befall him on the way, Stj. 212; bæri þat þá svá við, at hann ryfi, it then perchance might happen, that …, 102; þat bar við at Högni kom, 169, 172, 82; raun (acc.) berr á, it is proved by the fact, event, Fms. ix. 474, x. 185.
    2. temp., e-t berr á, it happens to fall on …; ef þing (acc.) ber á hina helgu viku, if the parliament falls on the holy week (Whitsun), Grág. i. 106; ef Crucis messu (acc.) berr á Drottins dag, Rb. 44; berr hana (viz. Petrs messu, June 29) aldrei svá optarr á öldinni, 78; þat er nú berr oss næst, what has occurred of late, Sturl. iii. 182: b. í móti, to happen exactly at a time; þetta (acc.) bar í móti at þenna sama dag andaðist Brandr biskup, Bs. i. 468; b. saman, id.; bar þat saman, at pá var Gunnarr at segja brennusöguna, just when G. was about telling the story, Nj. 269.
    3. metaph. of agreement or separation; en þat (acc.) þykir mjök saman b. ok þessi frásögn, Fms. x. 276: with dat., bar öllum sögum vel saman, all the records agreed well together, Nj. 100, v. l.; berr nú enn í sundr með þeim, Bjarna ok Þorkatli at sinni, B. and Th. missed each other, Vápn. 25.
    4. denoting cause; e-t (acc.) berr til …, causes a thing; ætluðu þat þá allir, at þat mundi til bera, that that was the reason, Nj. 75; at þat beri til skilnaðar okkars, that this will make us to part (divorce), 261; konungr spurði, hvat til bæri úgleði hans, what was the cause of his grief? Fms. vi. 355; þat berr til tunglhlaups, Rb. 32.
    β. meiri ván at brátt beri þat (acc.) til bóta, at herviliga steypi hans ríki, i. e. there will soon come help (revenge), Fms. x. 264; fjórir eru þeir hlutir er menn (acc.) berr í ætt á landi hér, there are four cases under which people may be adopted, Grág. i. 361.
    γ. e-t berr undir e-n, falls to a person’s lot; hon á arf at taka þegar er undir hana berr, in her turn, 179; mikla erfð (acc.) bar undir hana, Mar. (Fr.); berr yfir, of surpassing, Bs. ii. 121, 158; b. frá, id. (fráburðr); herðimikill svá at þat (acc.) bar frá því sem aðrir menn, Eg. 305; er sagt, at þat bæri frá hve vel þeir mæltu, it was extraordinary how well they did speak, Jb. 11; bar þat mest frá hversu illa hann var limaðr, but above all, how…, Ó. H. 74.
    5. with adverbial nouns in a dat. form; e-t berr bráðum, happens of a sudden; berr þetta (acc.) nú allbráðum, Fms. xi. 139; cp. vera bráðum borinn, to be taken by surprise (above); berr stórum, stærrum, it matters a great deal; ætla ek stærrum b. hin lagabrotin (acc.), they are much more important, matter more, vii. 305; var þat góðr kostr, svá at stórum bar, xi. 50; hefir oss orðit svá mikil vanhyggja, at stóru berr, an enormous blunder, Gísl. 51; svá langa leið, at stóru bar, Fas. i. 116; þat berr stórum, hversu mér þóknast vel þeirra athæfi, it amounts to a great deal, my liking their service, i. e. I do greatly like, Fms. ii. 37; eigi berr þat allsmám hversu vel mér líkar, in no small degree do I like, x. 296.
    β. with dat., it is fitting, becoming; svá mikit sem landeiganda (dat.) berr til at hafa eptir lögum, what he is legally entitled to, Dipl. iii. 10; berr til handa, it falls to one’s lot, v. above, Grág. i. 93.
    III. answering to Lat. oportet, absolutely or with an adverb, vel, illa, with infinit.; e-m berr, it beseems, becomes one; berr þat ekki né stendr þvílíkum höfuðfeðr, at falsa, Stj. 132; berr yðr (dat.) vel, herra, at sjá sannindi á þessu máli, Fms. ix. 326; sagði, at þat bar eigi Kristnum mönnum, at særa Guð, x. 22; þá siðu at mér beri vel, Sks. 353 B: used absol., berr vel, illa, it is beseeming, proper, fit, unbeseeming, unfit, improper; athæfi þat er vel beri fyrir konungs augliti, 282; þat þykir ok eigi illa bera, at maðr hafi svart skinn til hosna, i. e. it suits pretty well, 301: in case of a pers. pron. in acc. or dat. being added, the sentence becomes personal in order to avoid doubling the impers. sentence, e. g. e-m berr skylda (not skyldu) til, one is bound by duty; veit ek eigi hver skylda (nom.) yðr (acc.) ber til þess at láta jarl einn ráða, Fms. i. 52: also leaving the dat. out, skylda berr til at vera forsjámaðr með honum, vii. 280; eigi berr hér til úviska mín, it is not that I am not knowing, Nj. 135.
    IV. when the reflex. inflexion is added to the verb, the noun loses its impers. character and is turned from acc. into nom., e. g. þar (þat?) mun hugrinn minn mest hafa fyrir borizt, this is what I suspected, fancied, Lv. 34; cp. hugarburðr, fancy, and e-t berr fyrir e-n (above, C. I. 2); hefir þetta (nom.) vel í móti borizt, a happy coincidence, Nj. 104; ef svá harðliga kann til at berask, if the misfortunes do happen, Gþl. 55; barsk sú úhamingja (nom.) til á Íslandi, that mischief happened (no doubt the passage is thus to be emended), Bs. i. 78, but bar þá úhamingju …; þat (nom.) barsk at, happened, Fms. x. 253; fundir várir (nom.) hafa at borizt nokkurum sinnum, vii. 256; þat barsk at á einhverju sumri, Eg. 154; bærist at um síðir at allr þingheimrinn berðist, 765, cp. berast við, berask fyrir above (B. V.): berast, absol., means to be shaken, knocked about; var þess ván, at fylkingar mundu berast í hergöngunni, that they would be brought into some confusion, Fms. v. 74; Hrólfr gékk at ramliga, ok barst Atli (was shaken, gave away) fyrir orku sakir, þar til er hann féll. Fas. iii. 253; barst Jökull allr fyrir orku sakir (of two wrestling), Ísl. ii. 467, Fms. iii. 189: vide B. IV.
    D. In mod. usage the strong bera—bar is also used in impersonal phrases, denoting to let a thing be seen, shew, but almost always with a negative preceding, e. g. ekki bar (ber) á því, it could ( can) not be seen; að á engu bæri, láta ekki á bera ( to keep tight), etc. All these phrases are no doubt alterations from the weak verb bera, að, nudare, and never occur in old writers; we have not met with any instance previous to the Reformation; the use is certainly of late date, and affords a rare instance of weak verbs turning into strong; the reverse is more freq. the case.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > BERA

  • 90 hang

    I [hæŋ]
    1) sart.
    2) colloq. (knack)

    to get the hang of sth., of doing — capire come funziona qcs., come si fa

    II 1. [hæŋ]
    verbo transitivo (pass., p.pass. hung)
    1) (suspend) appendere, attaccare ( from a; by a, per; on a); (drape over) stendere ( over su); (peg up) stendere [ washing] (on su)
    2) (anche hang down) (let dangle) sospendere [rope, line] ( out of a); fare ciondolare, fare penzolare [arm, leg]

    to be hung with — essere ornato o addobbato di [flags, tapestries]; essere decorato con [ garlands]

    4) (interior decorating) attaccare, incollare [ wallpaper]
    5) ing. tecn. montare, incardinare [door, gate]
    6) gastr. fare frollare [ game]
    7) (pass., p.pass. hanged) impiccare [criminal, victim] ( for per)
    2.
    verbo intransitivo (pass., p.pass. hung)
    1) (be suspended) (on hook) essere appeso; (from height) essere sospeso; (on washing line) essere steso

    to hang from the ceiling — [ chandelier] pendere dal soffitto

    2) sart. (drape)
    3) (float) [fog, cloud] incombere, permanere; [smoke, smell] ristagnare
    4) (pass., p.pass. hanged) (die) morire impiccato
    3.
    verbo riflessivo (pass., p.pass. hanged)
    ••

    hang it all! — colloq. al diavolo!

    hang the expense! — colloq. al diavolo i soldi! crepi l'avarizia!

    hanged if I know! — colloq. che mi venga un colpo se lo so!

    to let it all hang out — colloq. lasciarsi andare

    * * *
    [hæŋ]
    past tense, past participle - hung; verb
    1) (to put or fix, or to be put or fixed, above the ground eg by a hook: We'll hang the picture on that wall; The picture is hanging on the wall.) appendere, attaccare
    2) (to fasten (something), or to be fastened, at the top or side so that it can move freely but cannot fall: A door hangs by its hinges.) girare, collocare
    3) ((past tense, past participle hanged) to kill, or to be killed, by having a rope put round the neck and being allowed to drop: Murderers used to be hanged in the United Kingdom, but no-one hangs for murder now.) impiccare
    4) ((often with down or out) to be bending, drooping or falling downwards: The dog's tongue was hanging out; Her hair was hanging down.) penzolare; ricadere
    5) (to bow (one's head): He hung his head in shame.) abbassare
    •
    - hanging
    - hangings
    - hangman
    - hangover
    - get the hang of
    - hang about/around
    - hang back
    - hang in the balance
    - hang on
    - hang together
    - hang up
    * * *
    hang /hæŋ/
    n.
    1 [u] modo di pendere (o di sporgere); inclinazione ( del capo, ecc.)
    2 [u] aplomb (franc.); appiombo; modo di cadere ( di abiti, ecc.)
    ● hang-up ► hangup □ (fam.) to get the hang of, impratichirsi di; imparare a usare; fare la mano a □ (fam.) not to care (o not to give) a hang about, infischiarsene (o fregarsene) di: I don't give a hang about what other people think, me ne frego di quel che pensano gli altri.
    ♦ (to) hang /hæŋ/
    (pass. e p. p. hung, ma hanged nel senso di impiccare)
    A v. t.
    1 appendere; sospendere; attaccare; stendere ( ad asciugare): to hang a photo on the wall, appendere una foto al muro: I'll hang the washing out in the terrace, stenderò la biancheria nella terrazza; to hang wallpaper [the curtains], attaccare carta da parati [le tendine]
    2 decorare di; ornare con: The hall was hung with flags, la sala era ornata (o pavesata) di bandiere
    3 collocare, mettere, porre, montare ( su cardini e sim.)
    4 appendere ( carne, ecc.) a essiccare; appendere ( selvaggina) a frollare: hung beef, carne di manzo essiccata
    5 impiccare: The murderer was hanged, l'assassino è stato impiccato
    6 ( arte) esporre ( quadri e sim.)
    7 affibbiare, appioppare ( un soprannome, ecc.)
    B v. i.
    1 pendere; penzolare; essere appeso (o attaccato); stare sospeso: The greyhound's tongue was hanging out, il levriero aveva la lingua di fuori (o penzoloni); The boy was hanging from a tree, il ragazzo era attaccato a un albero
    2 ( di un uscio, ecc.) essere collocato, girare ( su cardini e sim.)
    3 ( di decisione, ecc.: spec. to hang in the balance) essere in sospeso; pendere (fig.); essere incerto
    4 (fig.) indugiare, trattenersi; permanere, persistere; rimanere sospeso: The smell of soup hung in the room, l'odore della zuppa persisteva (o ristagnava) nella stanza; The hawk hung in the air, il falco restava sospeso (o immobile) nell'aria
    5 ( USA) ► hang out
    7 ( d'abito) cadere ( bene, male, ecc.): This coat hangs well, questo cappotto cade bene
    8 (comput.: di un computer che non risponde più agli input dell'utente) bloccarsi; arrestarsi improvvisamente
    9 morire impiccato; finire sulla forca
    ● to hang fire, ( d'arma da fuoco) sparare in ritardo, far cilecca; (fig.) indugiare, rimanere in sospeso; prendersi una pausa □ (fam. USA) to hang a left [right] turn, prendere (o svoltare) a sinistra [a destra] □ (fam. USA) to hang ( one's) hat, andare a stare, andare ad abitare □ to hang one's head ( in shame), abbassare la testa, stare a capo chino ( per la vergogna) □ to hang heavy, gravare, aleggiare; ( del tempo) trascorrere lentamente □ ( di stoffa, ecc.) to hang in folds, ricadere in pieghe □ (fam.) to hang (on) in there, resistere; tenere duro; non mollare □ to hang oneself, impiccarsi □ (fam. GB) Hang it ( all)!, accidenti!; maledizione!; al diavolo! □ (fam., spec. USA) to hang loose!, rilassarsi: Hang loose!, rilassati!, non preoccuparti! □ (fam. GB) Hang st.!, al diavolo!; chi se ne importa di qc.!: Let's have another slice of cake and hang the diet!, prendiamo un'altra fetta di torta e al diavolo la dieta! □ (fam. USA) to hang tough, essere irremovibile; tenere duro □ (volg.) Go hang!, impiccati!, va al diavolo! □ I'll be hanged if…, che il diavolo mi porti se…; che Dio mi fulmini se… □ (prov.) One might (o may) as well be hanged for a sheep as ( for) a lamb, poiché la pena è la stessa, tanto vale commettere il peccato più grave.
    NOTA D'USO: - hanged o hung?-
    * * *
    I [hæŋ]
    1) sart.
    2) colloq. (knack)

    to get the hang of sth., of doing — capire come funziona qcs., come si fa

    II 1. [hæŋ]
    verbo transitivo (pass., p.pass. hung)
    1) (suspend) appendere, attaccare ( from a; by a, per; on a); (drape over) stendere ( over su); (peg up) stendere [ washing] (on su)
    2) (anche hang down) (let dangle) sospendere [rope, line] ( out of a); fare ciondolare, fare penzolare [arm, leg]

    to be hung with — essere ornato o addobbato di [flags, tapestries]; essere decorato con [ garlands]

    4) (interior decorating) attaccare, incollare [ wallpaper]
    5) ing. tecn. montare, incardinare [door, gate]
    6) gastr. fare frollare [ game]
    7) (pass., p.pass. hanged) impiccare [criminal, victim] ( for per)
    2.
    verbo intransitivo (pass., p.pass. hung)
    1) (be suspended) (on hook) essere appeso; (from height) essere sospeso; (on washing line) essere steso

    to hang from the ceiling — [ chandelier] pendere dal soffitto

    2) sart. (drape)
    3) (float) [fog, cloud] incombere, permanere; [smoke, smell] ristagnare
    4) (pass., p.pass. hanged) (die) morire impiccato
    3.
    verbo riflessivo (pass., p.pass. hanged)
    ••

    hang it all! — colloq. al diavolo!

    hang the expense! — colloq. al diavolo i soldi! crepi l'avarizia!

    hanged if I know! — colloq. che mi venga un colpo se lo so!

    to let it all hang out — colloq. lasciarsi andare

    English-Italian dictionary > hang

  • 91 m|ieć

    impf (mam, masz) Ⅰ vt 1. (posiadać) (na własność) to have (got), to own [dom, samochód, mikrofalówkę]; (do dyspozycji) to have (got); (prowadzić) to run [firmę, warsztat]
    - mają dom na wsi they have a. own a house in the country
    - miał po ojcu warsztat samochodowy he had a. owned a garage left to him by his father
    - nasze muzeum ma dużą kolekcję impresjonistów our museum has (got) a large collection of Impressionist paintings
    - mam dla ciebie prezent/tę książkę o kotach I’ve got a present/that book about cats for you
    - miał wszystkiego dwie pary butów he only had two pairs of shoes
    - ubrała się w to, co miała she put on what she had
    - nie mam psa I don’t have a. I haven’t got a dog
    - nie mamy ani telewizora, ani pralki we have neither a TV nor a washing machine
    - wydawnictwo nie ma funduszy na zatrudnienie specjalisty the publishers can’t afford to employ a specialist
    - nie mam nic do jedzenia I’ve got nothing to eat, I don’t have anything to eat
    - czy oni mają namiot? have they got a tent?, do they have a tent?
    - masz scyzoryk? have you got a penknife?
    - czy ma pan bagaż? have you got any luggage?
    - czy macie gaz? have you got gas?
    - mieć coś przy sobie to have sth on one
    - masz przy sobie jakieś drobne? have you got any change on you?
    - gdzie masz klucze/moją książkę? what have you done with the keys/my book?
    - gdzie masz rower? where’s your bike? pot.
    - mieć na coś to have money for sth
    - miałem tylko na jedno piwo I only had for one beer
    - (on) ma na przyjemności, a nie ma na lekarza he has money to spend on pleasures, but he can’t afford a doctor
    - nie miał na nowe buty, a co dopiero na samochód he couldn’t afford a pair of new shoes, let alone a car
    - mieć za co coś zrobić to have enough money to do sth, to be able to afford to do sth
    - nie mieli za co wyjechać na wakacje they didn’t have enough to go on holiday, they couldn’t afford to go on holiday
    - nie mają z czego żyć they don’t have enough to live on
    - jak masz na imię? what’s your name?
    - mam na imię Maria my name’s Maria
    - (on) ma na nazwisko Nowak his (sur)name is Nowak
    - mieć coś na sobie to have sth on, to be wearing sth
    - miał (na sobie) granatowy garnitur he had a blue suit on, he was wearing a blue suit
    - na głowie miała kapelusz, na szyi biały szalik she had a hat on her head and a white scarf round her neck
    - mieć kogoś u siebie (gościć) to have sb staying with one
    - od tygodnia mamy u siebie teściów we’ve had my in-laws (staying) with us for the past week
    - jeśli Legia wygra, mam u ciebie piwo! you owe me a beer if Legia win(s)
    - masz!/macie! (weź/weźcie) here!
    - macie kanapki, jedzcie! here’s the sandwiches, eat up! pot.
    - masz, włóż to na siebie! here, put this on!
    - (a) masz! (zadając razy) take that!
    - (a) masz za to, że kłamiesz, a masz, a masz! (and) take that for lying! and that! and that! pot.
    - masz za swoje! (dobrze ci tak) serves you right!
    - ma za swoje, że jest taki naiwny it serves him right for being so naive
    - mamy teraz za swoje dobre serce! that’s the thanks we get for being nice a. for all our kindness!
    - masz ci (los) a. masz tobie! blast (it)! pot., damn (it)! pot.
    - masz ci los, zapomniałam parasola! blast, I’ve forgotten my umbrella!
    - masz go/ją/ich! (wyrażające zaskoczenie) just look at him/her/them!
    - masz go, jaki mądrala! look at him, Mr Clever Dick! GB pot.
    2. (liczyć sobie) to be
    - mieć dwadzieścia lat to be twenty (years old)
    - ile ona ma lat? how old is she?
    - mieć dwa metry wzrostu/wysokości to be two metres tall/high
    - mieć sześć metrów głębokości/szerokości/długości to be six metres deep/wide/long
    - pokój ma sześć metrów na pięć the room is six by five metres
    - dom będzie miał siedem pięter the house will be seven storeys high a. will have seven storeys
    - kilometr ma tysiąc metrów one kilometre is a thousand metres
    3. (posiadać jako cechę) to have (got)
    - pokój ma dwa okna the room has two windows
    - miał niebieskie oczy/siwe włosy he had blue eyes/grey hair
    - miała dziurawe buty she had holes in her shoes
    - kubek ma wyszczerbiony brzeg the mug’s rim is chipped
    - miała męża Włocha/inżyniera her husband was Italian/an engineer
    - mieć talent/cierpliwość/odwagę to have talent/patience/courage
    - nie mieć talentu/cierpliwości/odwagi to lack talent/patience/courage
    - mieć takt/rozsądek to be tactful/sensible
    - mieć (swoje) wady i zalety to have one’s good and bad points
    - zasłony mają kolor wiśni the curtains are cherry red in colour
    - działka ma kształt prostokąta a. prostokątny the allotment is rectangular (in shape)
    - jej perfumy miały słodkawy zapach/zapach konwalii her scent was sweet smelling/smelled of lily of the valley
    - urodę miała po matce, a talent po ojcu her looks came from her mother and her talent from her father
    - za całe umeblowanie pokój miał zdezelowany stół the only piece of furniture in the room was a rickety table
    - mieć w sobie coś (być interesującym) to have a certain something
    - on ma w sobie coś z dziecka/roztargnionego profesora there is something of the child/the absent-minded professor in a. about him
    - nie mieć nic do czegoś to have nothing to do with sth
    - jej wyjazd nie ma nic do naszych planów her going away has nothing to do with our plans
    - marzenia mają to do siebie, że rzadko się spełniają the thing about dreams is that they rarely come true
    - miała to do siebie, że zawsze się spóźniała the thing about her was that she was always late
    4. (o stanie fizycznym i psychicznym) to have [grypę, gruźlicę, trudności]; to feel [ochotę, żal]; to have, to bear [urazę]
    - mieć gorączkę a. temperaturę to have a. be running a temperature
    - mieć 39° gorączki to have a temperature of 39 degrees
    - mieć złamaną nogę to have a broken leg
    - mieć częste bóle głowy to have frequent headaches
    - mieć pragnienie to be thirsty
    - mieć dobry apetyt to have a good a. hearty appetite
    - mieć wadę a. defekt to have a defect
    - mieć gumę pot. (w samochodzie) to have a flat pot.
    - mam nadzieję, że… I hope that…
    - mieć ochotę coś zrobić to feel like doing sth
    - miała ochotę płakać she felt like crying
    - mieć przekonanie/pewność, że… to be convinced/sure a. certain that…
    - mieć kogoś/czegoś dość a. dosyć to have had enough of sb/sth, to be fed up with sb/sth
    - mam tego powyżej uszu a. po dziurki w nosie! pot. I’ve had it up to here! pot.
    - mieć coś wypisane w oczach a. na czole a. na twarzy to have sth written all over one’s face
    - miała winę wypisaną na twarzy she had guilt written all over her face
    5. (o relacjach między ludźmi) to have [syna, córkę, przyjaciół, wrogów]
    - to dziecko nie ma matki/ojca this boy/girl has no mother/father
    - ona nie ma rodzeństwa she has no brothers or sisters
    - ona będzie miała dziecko she’s going to have a. she’s expecting a baby
    - miała z nim dwóch synów she had two sons by him
    - miał za żonę piekielnicę his wife was a real she-devil a. spitfire
    - nie miał do kogo zwrócić się o pomoc he had no-one to turn to for help
    - mieć kogoś przy sobie a. obok siebie a. przy boku to have sb at one’s side
    - mieć kogoś/coś na uwadze a. na względzie to have sb/sth in mind, to take sb/sth into consideration
    - mieć z kimś porachunki to have a bone to pick with sb
    - mieć kogoś/coś przeciwko sobie to have sb/sth against one
    - miał przeciwko sobie opinię publiczną public opinion was against him
    - mieć przyjemność/zaszczyt coś zrobić książk. to have the pleasure/honour to do a. of doing sth
    - miałem zaszczyt poznać pańskich rodziców I had the honour of meeting your parents
    - mam przyjemność przedstawić państwu naszego gościa I have the pleasure of introducing our guest
    - z kim mam przyjemność? książk. to whom do I have the honour of speaking? książk., także iron.
    - mieć coś/nie mieć nic przeciwko komuś/czemuś to have something/nothing against sb/sth
    - mieć coś do kogoś pot. to have something against sb
    - do ciebie nic nie mam I’ve got nothing against you
    - mieć coś na kogoś to have the goods a. the dope on sb pot.
    - niczego na mnie nie mają they’ve got nothing on me pot.
    - mam z nią do pomówienia a. pogadania I need to have a (serious) talk with her
    - mieć kogoś nad sobą to have sb above one
    - kierownik ma nad sobą dyrektora, a dyrektor – zarząd the manager answers to the director and the director answers to the board
    - mieć kogoś pod sobą to be in charge of sb
    - (ona) ma pod sobą dwudziestu pracowników she’s in charge of a staff of twenty
    - kapral miał pod sobą dziesięciu żołnierzy the corporal had ten men under his command a. under him
    - mieć kogoś za sobą (być popieranym) to have sb behind one, to have sb’s backing
    - mieli za sobą większość the majority was a. were behind them, they had the majority behind them
    - mieć kogoś za głupca to take sb for a fool
    - ich zachowanie mam za nieco naiwne I consider their behaviour rather naive
    - za kogo pan mnie ma! who do you take me for!, who do you think I am!
    - mieć w kimś rywala/sojusznika to have a rival/an ally in sb
    - mieć kogoś pot. (być związanym z kimś) to have somebody, to be involved with somebody
    - chwalił się, że miał je wszystkie pot. (odbył stosunek) he boasted of having had them all pot.
    - płacą tak dużo, że mogą mieć każdego they pay so much they can take on a. hire anyone they like
    6. (znajdować się w jakiejś sytuacji) to have (got) [długi, posadę, połączenie]
    - mam dobrą komunikację do pracy I’ve got good connections to work
    - centrum miasta ma dobrą komunikację z przedmieściami there are good connections from the city centre to the suburbs
    - mieć słuszność a. rację to be right
    - mieć ciepło/przytulnie to be warm/cosy
    - owinęła dziecko szalem, żeby miało ciepło she put a scarf round the baby to keep him/her warm
    - mam daleko/blisko do szkoły I have a long way/I don’t have far to go to school
    - ty to masz dobrze, nie musisz wstawać o siódmej it’s alright for you, you don’t have to get up at seven (a.m.)
    - mieliśmy tu wczoraj burzę/śnieżycę we had a storm/snowstorm here yesterday
    - mamy dziś słoneczną pogodę it’s sunny today
    - mam dziś kiepski dzień I’m having one of those days (today)
    - kłopotów z nim miałam co niemiara I’ve had no end of trouble with him
    - co ja z tobą mam? what am I to do with you?
    - jest całkiem młoda, chciałaby jeszcze mieć coś z życia she’s still very young, she’d like to get something out of life pot.
    - (on) haruje od świtu do nocy i co z tego ma? he slaves away from morning to night, and what does he have to show for it?
    - miał przed sobą kilka godzin marszu he had several hours of walking ahead of a. in front of him
    - miała przed sobą trudną rozmowę z szefem she had a difficult conversation with the boss ahead of her
    - mieć przed sobą przyszłość to have a (bright) future ahead of a. before one
    - miał przed sobą karierę he had a brilliant career ahead of a. in front of him
    - mieć coś za a. poza sobą to have sth behind one
    - ma za sobą trzyletnie doświadczenie he has three years’ experience behind him
    - mam już to wszystko za sobą all that is behind me now
    - mam co robić, nie nudzę się I’ve got things to do, I don’t sit around
    - nie mieć gdzie mieszkać/spać to have nowhere to live/sleep
    - nie mam gdzie przenocować I have nowhere to spend the night
    - nie mieć kiedy spać/jeść/odpocząć to not have time to sleep/eat/relax
    - nie mają kiedy w ścianach wiercić, tylko w niedzielę! of course, they have to drill holes in the wall on a Sunday!
    - mieć czas to have time (coś zrobić to do sth)
    - nie miałem czasu zająć się twoją sprawą I didn’t have time to deal with your problem
    - na napisanie wypracowania macie godzinę you have an hour to write the essay
    - nie miałeś mi tu kogo przyprowadzić!? why did you have to bring him/her/them here (of all people)?!
    - mieć coś/nie mieć nic do powiedzenia (dużo/mało wiedzieć) to have something/nothing to say (na temat kogoś/czegoś about sb/sth)
    - mieć coś/nie mieć nic do powiedzenia a. gadania pot. (o decydującym głosie) to have a say/no say
    - ona nie ma w tej sprawie nic do powiedzenia a. gadania she has no say in the matter
    - nie mamy już sobie nic więcej do powiedzenia we’ve got nothing more to say to each other
    - mieć zły/dobry czas Sport to have a poor/good a. fast time
    - mieć pierwsze/dziesiąte miejsce Sport to come first/tenth, to be in first/tenth place
    - mam z nią wielką wygodę, sprząta, robi mi zakupy she’s a great help to me: she cleans and does my shopping
    - nie masz co narzekać you’ve got nothing to complain about
    - nie masz co się denerwować there’s no reason (for you) to get upset
    - nie masz czego a. co żałować, film był kiepski you didn’t miss much: the film was hopeless
    - w domu nie masz co się pokazywać you’d better not show your face at home pot.
    7. (brać udział) to have [zebranie, koncert, egzamin, próbę]
    - (on) ma teraz naradę ze swym zastępcą he’s in conference at the moment with his deputy
    - mieć sprawę a. proces to be on trial (o coś/o zrobienie czegoś for sth/for doing sth)
    - ma sprawę a. proces o zabójstwo/spowodowanie wypadku samochodowego he’s on trial for murder/causing a car accident
    8. (ukończyć etap nauki) to have, to hold [dyplom, tytuł]
    - mieć studia a. wyższe wykształcenie to have completed higher education
    - mój ojciec miał tylko cztery klasy my father only did four years at school
    - miał już zawód i mógł rozpocząć samodzielne życie he’d completed his training and could now start his own life
    - miał dwa fakultety he had graduated in two subjects
    9. (znaleźć się w określonym miejscu lub czasie) wreszcie mamy stację here’s the station at last
    - mamy drugi tydzień zimy it’s the second week of winter
    - którego dziś mamy? what’s the date today?
    - mamy dziś pierwszy stycznia/poniedziałek it’s January the 1st/Monday today
    - którą masz godzinę? what time do you make it? pot.; what’s the time by your watch?
    - mieć kogoś/coś po prawej/lewej stronie to have sb/sth on one’s right/left
    - miał przed/za sobą dwóch strażników he had a. there were two guards in front of him/behind him
    Ⅱ v aux. 1. (dla wyrażenia powinności) macie teraz spać you’re to a. you have to (get off to) sleep now
    - masz to zrobić natychmiast! you’re to do it right now!
    - co mam zrobić/jej powiedzieć? what am I (supposed) to do/tell her?
    - po co się mam wysilać? why should I bother?, why should I make the effort?
    - masz tego nikomu nie powtarzać! (and) don’t go repeating a. telling it to anyone!
    - i ja mam w to uwierzyć? and you/they want me to a. I’m supposed to believe that?
    - mieć coś do zrobienia to have sth to do
    - ma obowiązek do spełnienia s/he has a duty to perform
    - mam sprawę do załatwienia I’ve got something to sort out
    - mamy zaległości do odrobienia we’ve got a backlog of work to catch up on
    2. (zamiar, przewidywanie) (ona) ma przyjść o drugiej she’s expected (to come) at two
    - miano zburzyć ich dom their house was to be demolished
    - samolot miał wylądować w Warszawie, ale… the plane was supposed to land a. have landed in Warsaw, but…
    - podobno jutro ma być ładna pogoda it’s supposed to be good a. nice weather tomorrow
    - w pozostałej części kraju ma nadal padać in the rest of the country continuing rain is expected
    - miała umrzeć w nędzy w wieku czterdziestu lat she was to die in poverty at the age of forty
    - przyszłość miała pokazać, że się myli subsequent events were to prove him/her wrong
    - jak się miało okazać as things a. it turned out; as it transpired książk.
    - i co ja mam z tobą zrobić? what am I (supposed) to do with you?
    - jeśli mielibyśmy się nie zobaczyć przed twoim wyjazdem, baw się dobrze in case we don’t see each other before you leave, have a good time
    - niech się stanie, co się ma stać let things happen as they will
    - właśnie miałem wyjść, kiedy zadzwonił telefon I was just about to leave a. just on the point of leaving when the phone rang
    - właśnie miałam powiedzieć to samo I was just about to a. just going to say the same thing
    - czy mam przez to rozumieć, że… am I to understand (by that) that…
    - mieć coś do sprzedania/zaproponowania to have sth to sell/propose
    - choćby a. żeby nie wiem co się miało stać, (to)… no matter what happens a. might happen…
    - choćbym a. żebym miał pęknąć a. trupem paść pot. even if it kills me pot.
    3. (rezultat) mieć coś zrobione to have sth done
    - mam już napisaną pracę I’ve already written the essay
    - miał ukończone wyższe studia he had been to university/college
    - czy macie załatwione bilety? have you booked/got the tickets?
    - pieniądze mam dobrze schowane I’ve put the money in a safe place
    - mam obiecaną podwyżkę I’ve been promised a rise
    - miał przykazane trzymać język za zębami he was a. he’d been told to keep his mouth shut pot.
    4. (zdziwienie, rozczarowanie) ja miałbym to powiedzieć? I said that?!
    - ona miałaby mi się podobać? you think I find her attractive?
    - miałbyś sumienie to zrobić? could you do (something like) that (with a clear conscience)?
    - to ma być hotel czterogwiazdkowy? (z dezaprobatą) and you/they call this a. this is supposed to be a four-star hotel?!
    - ten grubas to miałbym być ja!? (z niedowierzaniem) is this/that fatso really me? pot.
    - pokazał nam skórę tygrysa, którego miał upolować w Afryce (z powątpiewaniem) he showed us the skin of a tiger, which he is supposed to have killed in Africa
    Ⅲ mieć się 1. (być w stanie, położeniu) to be; (czuć się) to feel, to be
    - ciotka wyzdrowiała i ma się dobrze auntie has recovered and is doing well
    - jak się mają twoi rodzice? how are your parents?
    - jak się masz! (powitanie) how are you?; how’s it going? pot.
    - mam się dzisiaj lepiej I feel better today
    - sprawy mają się nieźle things are working out (quite) well
    - jak się rzeczy mają? how do things stand?
    - rzecz ma się tak, że… the thing is that…
    - jak te dwie wersje mają się do siebie? how do the two versions compare?
    - jak to się ma jedno do drugiego? how do the two compare?
    - teoria nijak się miała do praktyki the theory was (completely) divorced from practice
    - A tak się ma do B, jak C do D a. A i B tak się mają do siebie, jak C i D A is to B like C is to D
    - mieli się do siebie jak dzień do nocy they were like chalk and cheese
    2. (uważać się za) to think a. consider oneself
    - mieć się za artystę/człowieka honoru to consider oneself (to be) an artist/a man of honour
    - (on) ma się za Bóg wie co pot. he thinks he’s God (almighty) pot.
    - miała się za bliską śmierci she thought she was about to a. going to die
    3. (być bliskim) mieć się ku końcowi to be drawing to a close a. an end
    - miało się a. dzień miał się ku zachodowi it was getting towards sunset
    - sytuacja ma się ku lepszemu the situation is looking better
    - ma się na deszcz it looks like rain
    - miało się na burzę a storm was brewing, there was thunder in the air
    - wiedzieć, jak się rzeczy mają to know how things stand a. are
    Ⅳ ma Fin. (zapis księgowy) credit
    - winien i ma debit and credit
    - zapisać coś po stronie „ma” to enter sth on the credit side
    Ⅴ mam! inter. (przypomniałem sobie) I’ve got it!
    - (już) mam! mieszkaliśmy na tej samej ulicy! I’ve got it! we used to live in the same street!
    - mam cię! a. tu cię mam! (złapałem cię, przyłapałem cię) I’ve got you!; got you! pot.
    - mam cię, już mi nie uciekniesz! got you, you won’t get away now!
    Ⅵ nie ma być
    ■ ma się rozumieć a. wiedzieć! it a. that goes without saying!
    - ma się rozumieć, że przyjdę of course I’ll come
    - mieć głowę a. łebpot. (na karku a. nie od parady) to have a good head on one’s shoulders
    - on to ma łeb! he’s no fool!
    - mieć głowę do interesów to have a good head for business
    - nie mam teraz do tego głowy I don’t want to think about it/that now
    - mieć kogoś/coś w nosiepot. a. gdzieśeuf. a. w głębokim poważaniueuf. to not care a damn about sb/sth pot.; to not give a monkey’s about sb/sth pot., euf.
    - mam to wszystko gdzieś! pot. to hell with it all! pot.
    - mieć kogoś/coś w dupie wulg. to not give a shit a. toss GB about sb/sth wulg.
    - sie masz! pot. (powitanie) hi! pot.

    The New English-Polish, Polish-English Kościuszko foundation dictionary > m|ieć

  • 92 stand

    1. I
    1) the table won't stand, one leg is broken стол не стоит, у него одна ножка сломана; don't trouble yourself, I can stand не беспокойтесь, я могу постоять /я постою/; I didn't know where to stand я не знал, где стать; the audience stood and applauded публика встала и начала аплодировать; he was commanded to stand ему приказали встать /подняться/; let the milk (the tea, the liquid, etc.) stand пусть молоко и т.д. постоит /отстоится/; keep /leave/ smth. standing not a stone was left standing камня на камне не оставила; get smth. to stand поставить что-л.
    2) stand! croft!; who goes there? stand and be identified стой! кто идет?; all stand! всем встать!
    3) the words (the passage, this translation, etc.) may stand эти слова и т.д. могут остаться /можно оставить/ без изменений; the enemy would not stand противник не устоит /не выдержит/; how much of his philosophy will stand? что можно взять /применить/ из его философии?; the contract (the agreement, the order, the bet, the bargain, his resolution, etc.) stands контракт и т.д. остается в силе; the same objection stands это возражение остается /не снимается/; the rule against lateness will stand правило, запрещающее опаздывать, будет действовать и впредь || as, matters /affairs, things/ stand при таком /создавшемся/ положении вещей /дел/; the passage must be printed as it stands отрывок должен быть напечатан /следует напечатать/ без изменений /в таком виде, как он есть/; as it stands как есть; how much for it as it stands? сколько вы хотите за все?, сколько это стоит как есть?
    4) these colours will (do not) stand это (не)стойкие краски
    2. II
    1) stand in some manner stand erectly (/squarely/, courageously, obediently, meekly, wistfully, sullenly, haughtily, etc.) стоять прямо и т.д.; stand at ease (at attention) стоять вольно (смирно); stand still! не двигайтесь!, не шевелитесь!, стойте спокойно!; he could hardly stand он едва держался на ногах; stand side by side (shoulder to shoulder) стоять рядом /бок о бок/ (плечом к плечу); he stood by helplessly он беспомощно стоял в стороне; the door stood ajar дверь была приоткрыта; stand somewhere don't just stand there, do something! что же ты стоишь, сделай что-нибудь!; stand aside (away, outside, etc.) стоять в стороне и т, т.д.; stand aside to let her pass посторонитесь и дайте ей пройти; stand back! осади!; the house stands back from the road дом стоит далеко от дороги; stand back or you'll be crushed посторонитесь, a то задавят; stand back from the barrier отойди от барьера; а tree which stood by дерево, которое стояло неподалеку; the box stands over there ящик стоит вон там; stand for some time I've been standing all day я простоял [на ногах] весь день; we had to stand all the way нам пришлось простоять всю дорогу; the ruins still stand руины сохранились до сих пор; а tall poplar tree (a huge oak, a house, etc.) once stood here здесь когда-то стоял высокий тополь и т.д. ; the corn is still standing хлеб еще стоит /не убран/
    2) stand in some manner stand alone а) стоять /быть/ одному; б) не иметь сторонников; in this opinion I don't stand alone я не один [придерживаюсь] такого мнения; the matter stands thus дело обстоит следующим образом; as things now stand I'll have to quit my job при создавшемся /нынешнем/ положении вещей /если положение не изменится,/ мне придется уйти с работы; this is how I stand такова моя позиция;. I wish I knew where I stood я хотел бы знать, что со мной будет; how do matters stand? как обстоят дела?; how does the dollar stand? каков курс доллара?
    3. III
    1) stand smth. stand an attack (a blow, a siege, rough handling, the enemy's fire, a loss, a shock, a rigid examination, raillery, etc.) выдерживать /выносить/ атаку и т, т.д.; stand heat (the cold weather, a damp soil, noise, his professional attitude, criticism, etc.) выдерживать /выносить/ жару и т.д.; stand the test /the trial/ выдержать испытание; he'll have to stand trial он должен предстать перед судом; stand much washing (much rain, etc.) не портиться от частой стирки и т.д.; these boots stood a good deal of wear эти ботинки долго носились /видали виды/; his eyes are strong enough to stand the glare у него хорошие глаза, они вполне выдержат такой яркий свет; the house will stand another century дом простоит еще сто лет; how does he stand the pain? как он переносит боль?; his nerves couldn't stand the strain у него нервы не выдержали напряжения; I can stand a good deal but I won't have insolence я многое могу стерпеть, но наглости не потерплю; stand smb. usually in the negative I can't stand this woman (the fellow, his father, etc.) я не выношу /не терплю, терпеть не могу, не перевариваю/ эту женщину и т.д.
    2) stand smth. stand six feet быть ростом в шесть футов; the score stood 18 to 14 счет был 18:14
    3) stand smth. stand drinks (ice-cream, dinner, etc.) угощать вином и т.д.; who is going to stand treat? кто угощает?
    4) stand smb. stand sentry /sentinel/ (model, umpire, etc.) быть часовым /стоять на часах/ и т.д.; stand godfather (godmother, etc.) выступать в роли крестного отца /быть крестным отцом/ и т.д.
    4. IV
    1) stand smth. somewhere stand the lamp over there (the box here, etc.) поставьте лампу туда и т.д.
    2) stand smth., smb. for some time usually in the negative I can't stand it any longer я этого больше не выдержу, я больше не могу этого терпеть; I can't stand the man another day я не вынесу этого человека ни одного лишнего дня; she stood the shock well она мужественно перенесла этот удар
    5. V
    stand smb. smth. coll. stand one's friend a dinner (you a drink, us champagne, etc.) угощать друга обедом и т.д.
    6. X
    stand in some state stand ashamed (confused, abashed, bewildered, dishonoured, etc.) испытывать стыд и т.д.; stand uncovered стоять без головного убора, снять шапку; he stands accused of a crime его обвиняют в преступлении; he stands convicted of treachery его признали виновным в измене; you may stand assured of his protection можете рассчитывать на его защиту, можете быть уверенным в его покровительстве; stand indebted to this man быть обязанным этому человеку; stand unrivalled не иметь соперников; stand corrected признавать справедливость замечаний /свои ошибки/
    7. XI
    be stood somewhere if he does it again he will be stood in the corner если он еще раз так сделает, его поставят в угол
    8. XIII
    stand to do smth. stand to win /to gain/ (to be saved, etc.) иметь [все] шансы /все основания/ выиграть и т.д.; how much do you stand to lose? сколько вы при этом можете потерять?; what does he stand to lose? чем он рискует?; we stand to lose nothing мы ничего не теряем
    9. XIV
    stand doing smth.
    1) stand bowing (wondering, gazing at the scene, looking at me, looking over my shoulder, etc.) стоять и кланяться и т.д.; don't stand there arguing about it что вы стоите и спорите?; I am tired of standing here [and] waiting мне надоело тут стоять и ждать
    2) usually in the negative with can; I can't stand waiting (writing letters, taking care of kids, etc.) я не выношу /терпеть не могу/ ждать и т.д.; she can't stand being kept waiting (being looked at, being laughed at, being talked back at, etc.) она терпеть не может /не выносит/, когда ее заставляют ждать и т.д.
    10. XV
    1) stand silent (still, upright /erect/, close to smth., next to me, etc.) стоять молча и т.д.; stand straight, don't stoop стойте прямо, не горбитесь; the door stands open дверь открыта; the table (the wall, etc.) stands firm стол и т.д. устойчив /крепко стоит/ и т.д.
    2) stand firm стойко держаться; stand firm on the ground крепко стоять на ногах; stand firm in one's views иметь твердые убеждения; stand fast to one's resolution не отступать от своего решения; stand neutral сохранять нейтралитет, оставаться нейтральным; stand idle ничего не делать; the factory is standing idle фабрика не работает /простаивает/; stand ready быть наготове; he stood ready to run он был готов пуститься бежать; stand ready for anything быть готовым ко всему: stand high высоко цениться; stand high in one's class (in a competitive examination, in one's profession, etc.) быть одним из первых /лучших, ведущих/ в классе и т.д.; stand high in public esteem пользоваться всеобщим уважением; stand high in the opinion of /with/ his chief быть на хорошем счету у начальства; food (meat, corn, etc.) stands high (higher than ever) цены на продукты и т.д. высокие (выше, чем когда-либо); stand first on the list (second in his class, third in the line for promotion, etc.) быть первым в списке и т.д.; stand second to none никому не уступать, быть первым
    11. XVI
    1) stand by (against, in, etc.) smth. stand by the window (against a wall, before me, in the corner, in the doorway, in the middle of the table, etc.) стоять у окна и т.д.; the house (the building, the cottage, the chapel, etc.) stands in a garden (by the river, at the foot of a hill, etc.) дом и т.д. расположен /находится/ в саду и т.д.; don't stand in the rain (in the sun) не стойте под дождем /на дожде/ (на солнце); I hate standing in queues я ненавижу стоять в очередях; tears stood in her eyes у нее в глазах стояли слезы; stand in smb.'s way стоять у кого-л. на дороге, мешать кому-л.; stand out of the way не мешать, посторониться, уйти с дороги; the truck stood in their way грузовик загораживал им дорогу; nothing now stands in our way ничто больше нам не мешает; nothing stands between you and success ничто не мешает твоему успеху; stand without support стоять без опоры; stand on smth., smb. the vase stands on the top shelf ваза стоит на верхней полке; he stood on my foot (on the beetle, etc.) он наступил мне на ногу и т.д.; stand on tiptoe стоять на цыпочках; Paris stands on the Seine Париж стоит на Сене; sweat stood on his forehead у него на лбу были /проступили/ капли пота; his hair stood on end [with fright] [от страха] у него волосы встали дыбом; stand for some time the castle (the old house, etc.) has stood for centuries замок и т.д. простоял века; the walls are still standing after the fire стены уцелели после пожара; he has stood many years against storm and earthquake много лет он выдерживал бури и землетрясения; let the mixture stand for three hours оставьте смесь постоять /пусть смесь постоит/ три часа
    2) stand at (below, among) smth. stand at the head of his class быть лучшим в классе; stand below smb. in class уступать кому-л. в своем классе; it stands among the first four universities of the world это один из четырех лучших университетов мира; stand alone among one's colleagues (among one's contemporaries, etc.) выделяться среди своих коллег и т.д.; stand over smb. he stood over me all the time I was working он все время стоял у меня над душой, пока я работал; he won't work unless someone stands over him он не будет работать, если над ним никто не стоит; stand by smb. stand by one's friends (by you whatever happens, by him to the last, etc.) быть на стороне /не бросать, поддерживать/ своих друзей и т.д.; I'll always stand by you in case of trouble я всегда готов помочь вам, если вы попадете в беду; stand by smth. stand by an agreement (by one's promise, by one's principles, by one's word,-etc.) придерживаться /не отступать от/ договора и т.д.; I stand by all I said then я верен тому, что тогда сказал; stand (up)on /by/ smth. stand on one's rights (on one's claims, by one's decision, etc.) настаивать на сваях правах и т.д.; western civilization stands upon the foundation reared by the Greeks and the Romans западная культура зиждется на фундаменте, созданном древними греками и римлянами; the case,-s on his testimony все дело основывается /зиждется/ на его показаниях /зависит от его показаний/; we stand on the threshold of a peace settlement мы находимся накануне /на пороге/ мирного урегулирования; stand for smth. stand for loyalty (for liberty, for freedom and justice, for racial tolerance, for reform, for the same principles, etc.) выступать за верность /в защиту верности/ и т.д.; it's difficult to know just what he stands for трудно, собственно, понять, каких он придерживается убеждений /каковы его убеждения/; stand on one's own feet /on one's own legs/ стоять на [собственных] ногах; ни от кого не зависеть; stand with smb. stand well with one's employers быть на хорошем счету у руководства; how does it stand with him? как он к этому относится?; stand in smth. where /how/ do we stand in the matter? какова наша позиция в этом вопросе? || stand in the same relation to her (to his father, to both parties, etc.) находиться /быть/ в одинаковых /равных, таких же/ отношениях с ней и т.д.
    3) stand for smth. stand for "adjective" (for "postscript", for "cash on delivery", etc.) обозначать прилагательное и т.д.; i stands for "pound" знак i обозначает фунт стерлингов; what do these letters stand for? что означают /как расшифровываются/ эти буквы?; the olive branch stands for peace ветвь оливкового дерева символизирует мир; black stands for mourning черный цвет stand знак траура; in their code each number stands for a letter в их шифре каждой букве соответствует цифра
    4) stand at smth. the score stands at 3:4 счет 3:4; the thermometer stands at 40 " in the shade термометр показывает сорок градусов в тени; the balance stands at i 50 итог равен пятидесяти фунтам
    5) stand for smth. usually in the negative or interrogative I won't stand for that (for any nonsense, for this treatment, etc.) я этого и т.д. не потерплю; 1 don't have to stand for such insolence я не обязан терпеть /переносить/ такое нахальство; how can you stand for his insolence? как вы можете терпеть его наглость?
    6) stand for smth. stand for Parliament (for the presidency, for election, for re-election to Congress, etc.) баллотироваться /выдвигать кандидатуру/ в парламент и т.д.
    7) semiaux || stand in need of smth. нуждаться в чем-л.; stand in need of help (of food and clothing, of money, of sleep, 'of instruction, of continual watering, of relief from one's sorrows, etc.) нуждаться в немощи и т.д.; the house stands in need of repair дом необходимо отремонтировать; stand in fear /in dread/ of smth., smb. бояться /страшиться/ чего-л., кого-л.; stand in awe of smth., smb. благоговеть перед чем-л., кем-л.; he stood in danger of being killed ему грозила опасность быть убитым; stand in contrast to smb., smth. резко отличаться от кого-л., чего-л.; stand on ceremony with smb. соблюдать условности в отношениях с кем-л.; he stands on terms of friendship with him он с ним [находится] в дружеских отношениях
    12. XX1
    stand as smb. stand as a sentinel стоять на посту, быть часовым; stand as candidate for the presidency (as Labour Candidate, as sponsor for him, etc.) выступать в качестве кандидата на пост президента и т.д.; stand as smth. stand as a description (as a type of British humour, etc.) представлять собой описание и т.д.
    13. XXI1
    1) stand smth., smb. in (by, on, etc.) smth. stand a chair in a corner (the armchair by the lamp, the box against the wall, the bottle on the table, the empty barrels on the floor, him-against the wall, etc.) поставить стул в угол и т.д.; stand some distance from smth. stand 15 yards from the road (10 feet from the ground, etc.) стоять в пятнадцати ярдах от дороги и т.д.
    2) abs stand six feet in his socks (in his shoes) он шести футов ростом; stand a giant among them он среди них великан
    3) stand smth. to smb. stand wine (a bottle, a treat, etc.) to the company угощать компанию вином и т.д., выставить вино и т.д. для всей компании
    4) stand smb. to /for/ smb. stand godfather (godmother) to the child быть крестным отцом (крестной матерью) ребенку; stand sponsor for him быть его покровителем
    14. XXV
    stand when... (till..., etc.) he stood when she entered the room он встал, когда она вошла в комнату; I stood there till I was tired я стоял там до тех пор, пока не устал

    English-Russian dictionary of verb phrases > stand

  • 93 kezka

    iz.
    1.
    a. ( urduritasuna) worry, concern, disquiet; ez egon kezkatan don't worry; \kezka {handia || larria} grave concern; i-i \kezka eman to {concern || worry} sb; \kezka eman dit it concerned me | I had qualms about it; ekonomia txarrak piztu zizkidan zenbait \kezka the bad economy gave me some cause for concern; badago gauza bat guri \kezka eman behar diguna there is a matter which should concern us; beste \kezkarik deus ez dute buruan, berriro etxeratzea baizik they have no other concern than returning to their homes; \kezkaren \kezkaz out of sheer concern
    b. ( ezinegona) apprehension, restlessness, uneasiness; \kezkaz dago he's {restless || apprehensive}; \kezka sartu zien, sorgin kontuekin he made them apprehensive with his tales of witches
    c. ( atsekabea) anguish, anxiety; \kezkatan nago I'm anxious | I'm anguished
    2. ( susmo txarra) misgiving, care, worry, suspicion; zer egin liteke horrelako \kezka eta beldurretatik libratzeko? what can be done to free ourselves from such misgivings and fears?; zer egin behar dugu \kezka eta zalantzak uxatzeko? what must we do to dispell misgivings and doubts?
    3.
    a. scruple, qualms; jendea hiltzen zuten bat ere \kezkarik gabe they killed people without any qualms; oiloa jan eta gero \kezka hartu zuen bekatu larria ez ote zen lapurtzea he ate the chicken and then began to have qualms whether it wasn't a great sin to steal
    b. ( damua) remorse, regret, contrition; \kezkak ukan to fell remorse | to have qualms; garbitu nahi dut neure arima \kezka guztietatik I want to cleanse my soul of all contrition
    4. (B) ( liskarra) fight, fray; katua saguagaz \kezkan egoen (B) the cat was fighting with the mouse

    Euskara Ingelesa hiztegiaren > kezka

  • 94 БИБЛИОГРАФИЯ

    Мы приняли следующие сокращения для наиболее часто упоминаемых книг и журналов:
    IJP - International Journal of Psycho-analysis
    JAPA - Journal of the American Psychoanalytic Association
    SE - Standard Edition of the Complete Psychological Works of Sigmund Freud, ed. James Strachey (London: Hogarth Press and the Institute of Psycho-Analysis, 1953—74.)
    PSOC - Psychoanalytic Study of the Child (New Haven: Yale University Press)
    PQ - Psychoanalytic Quarterly
    WAF - The Writings of Anna Freud, ed. Anna Freud (New York: International Universities Press, 1966—74)
    PMC - Psychoanalysis The Major Concepts ed. Burness E. Moore and Bernard D. Fine (New Haven: Yale University Press)
    \
    О словаре: _about - Psychoanalytic Terms and Concepts
    \
    1. Abend, S. M. Identity. PMC. Forthcoming.
    2. Abend, S. M. (1974) Problems of identity. PQ, 43.
    3. Abend, S. M., Porder, M. S. & Willick, M. S. (1983) Borderline Patients. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    4. Abraham, K. (1916) The first pregenital stage of libido. Selected Papers. London, Hogarth Press, 1948.
    5. Abraham, K. (1917) Ejaculatio praecox. In: selected Papers. New York Basic Books.
    6. Abraham, K. (1921) Contributions to the theory of the anal character. Selected Papers. New York: Basic Books, 1953.
    7. Abraham, K. (1924) A Short study of the development of the libido, viewed in the light of mental disorders. In: Selected Papers. London: Hogarth Press, 1927.
    8. Abraham, K. (1924) Manic-depressive states and the pre-genital levels of the libido. In: Selected Papers. London: Hogarth Press, 1949.
    9. Abraham, K. (1924) Selected Papers. London: Hogarth Press, 1948.
    10. Abraham, K. (1924) The influence of oral erotism on character formation. Ibid.
    11. Abraham, K. (1925) The history of an impostor in the light of psychoanalytic knowledge. In: Clinical Papers and Essays on Psychoanalysis. New York: Basic Books, 1955, vol. 2.
    12. Abrams, S. (1971) The psychoanalytic unconsciousness. In: The Unconscious Today, ed. M. Kanzer. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    13. Abrams, S. (1981) Insight. PSOC, 36.
    14. Abse, D W. (1985) The depressive character In Depressive States and their Treatment, ed. V. Volkan New York: Jason Aronson.
    15. Abse, D. W. (1985) Hysteria and Related Mental Disorders. Bristol: John Wright.
    16. Ackner, B. (1954) Depersonalization. J. Ment. Sci., 100.
    17. Adler, A. (1924) Individual Psychology. New York: Harcourt, Brace.
    18. Akhtar, S. (1984) The syndrome of identity diffusion. Amer. J. Psychiat., 141.
    19. Alexander, F. (1950) Psychosomatic Medicine. New York: Norton.
    20. Allen, D. W. (1974) The Feat- of Looking. Charlottesvill, Va: Univ. Press of Virginia.
    21. Allen, D. W. (1980) Psychoanalytic treatment of the exhibitionist. In: Exhibitionist, Description, Assessment, and Treatment, ed. D. Cox. New York: Garland STPM Press.
    22. Allport, G. (1937) Personality. New York: Henry Holt.
    23. Almansi, R. J. (1960) The face-breast equation. JAPA, 6.
    24. Almansi, R. J. (1979) Scopophilia and object loss. PQ, 47.
    25. Altman, L. Z. (1969) The Dream in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    26. Altman, L. Z. (1977) Some vicissitudes of love. JAPA, 25.
    27. American Psychiatric Association. (1987) Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, 3d ed. revised. Washington, D. C.
    28. Ansbacher, Z. & Ansbacher, R. (1956) The Individual Psychology of Alfred Adler. New York: Basic Books.
    29. Anthony, E. J. (1981) Shame, guilt, and the feminine self in psychoanalysis. In: Object and Self, ed. S. Tuttman, C. Kaye & M. Zimmerman. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    30. Arlow. J. A. (1953) Masturbation and symptom formation. JAPA, 1.
    31. Arlow. J. A. (1959) The structure of the deja vu experience. JAPA, 7.
    32. Arlow. J. A. (1961) Ego psychology and the study of mythology. JAPA, 9.
    33. Arlow. J. A. (1963) Conflict, regression and symptom formation. IJP, 44.
    34. Arlow. J. A. (1966) Depersonalization and derealization. In: Psychoanalysis: A General Psychology, ed. R. M. Loewenstein, L. M. Newman, M. Schur & A. J. Solnit. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    35. Arlow. J. A. (1969) Fantasy, memory and reality testing. PQ, 38.
    36. Arlow. J. A. (1969) Unconscious fantasy and disturbances of mental experience. PQ, 38.
    37. Arlow. J. A. (1970) The psychopathology of the psychoses. IJP, 51.
    38. Arlow. J. A. (1975) The structural hypothesis. PQ, 44.
    39. Arlow. J. A. (1977) Affects and the psychoanalytic situation. IJP, 58.
    40. Arlow. J. A. (1979) Metaphor and the psychoanalytic situation. PQ, 48.
    41. Arlow. J. A. (1979) The genesis of interpretation. JAPA, 27 (suppl.).
    42. Arlow. J. A. (1982) Problems of the superego concept. PSOC, 37.
    43. Arlow. J. A. (1984) Disturbances of the sense of time. PQ, 53.
    44. Arlow. J. A. (1985) Some technical problems of countertransference. PQ, 54.
    45. Arlow, J. A. & Brenner, C. (1963) Psychoanalytic Concepts and the Structural Theory, New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    46. Arlow, J. A. & Brenner, C. (1969) The psychopathology of the psychoses. IJP, 50.
    47. Asch, S. S. (1966) Depression. PSOC, 21.
    48. Asch, S. S. (1976) Varieties of negative therapeutic reactions and problems of technique. JAPA, 24.
    49. Atkins, N. (1970) The Oedipus myth. Adolescence, and the succession of generations. JAPA, 18.
    50. Atkinson, J. W. & Birch, D. (1970) The Dynamics of Action. New York: Wiley.
    51. Bachrach, H. M. & Leaff, L. A. (1978) Analyzability. JAPA, 26.
    52. Bacon, C. (1956) A developmental theory of female homosexuality. In: Perversions,ed, S. Lorand & M. Balint. New York: Gramercy.
    53. Bak, R. C. (1953) Fetishism. JAPA. 1.
    54. Bak, R. C. (1968) The phallic woman. PSOC, 23.
    55. Bak, R. C. & Stewart, W. A. (1974) Fetishism, transvestism, and voyeurism. An American Handbook of Psychiatry, ed. S. Arieti. New York: Basic Books, vol. 3.
    56. Balint, A. (1949) Love for mother and mother-love. IJP, 30.
    57. Balter, L., Lothane, Z. & Spencer, J. H. (1980) On the analyzing instrument, PQ, 49.
    58. Basch, M. F. (1973) Psychoanalysis and theory formation. Ann. Psychoanal., 1.
    59. Basch, M. F. (1976) The concept of affect. JAPA, 24.
    60. Basch, M. F. (1981) Selfobject disorders and psychoanalytic theory. JAPA, 29.
    61. Basch, M. F. (1983) Emphatic understanding. JAPA. 31.
    62. Balldry, F. Character. PMC. Forthcoming.
    63. Balldry, F. (1983) The evolution of the concept of character in Freud's writings. JAPA. 31.
    64. Begelman, D. A. (1971) Misnaming, metaphors, the medical model and some muddles. Psychiatry, 34.
    65. Behrends, R. S. & Blatt, E. J. (1985) Internalization and psychological development throughout the life cycle. PSOC, 40.
    66. Bell, A. (1961) Some observations on the role of the scrotal sac and testicles JAPA, 9.
    67. Benedeck, T. (1949) The psychosomatic implications of the primary unit. Amer. J. Orthopsychiat., 19.
    68. Beres, C. (1958) Vicissitudes of superego functions and superego precursors in childhood. FSOC, 13.
    69. Beres, D. Conflict. PMC. Forthcoming.
    70. Beres, D. (1956) Ego deviation and the concept of schizophrenia. PSOC, 11.
    71. Beres, D. (1960) Perception, imagination and reality. IJP, 41.
    72. Beres, D. (1960) The psychoanalytic psychology of imagination. JAPA, 8.
    73. Beres, D. & Joseph, E. D. (1965) Structure and function in psychoanalysis. IJP, 46.
    74. Beres, D. (1970) The concept of mental representation in psychoanalysis. IJP, 51.
    75. Berg, M D. (1977) The externalizing transference. IJP, 58.
    76. Bergeret, J. (1985) Reflection on the scientific responsi bilities of the International Psychoanalytical Association. Memorandum distributed at 34th IPA Congress, Humburg.
    77. Bergman, A. (1978) From mother to the world outside. In: Grolnick et. al. (1978).
    78. Bergmann, M. S. (1980) On the intrapsychic function of falling in love. PQ, 49.
    79. Berliner, B. (1966) Psychodynamics of the depressive character. Psychoanal. Forum, 1.
    80. Bernfeld, S. (1931) Zur Sublimierungslehre. Imago, 17.
    81. Bibring, E. (1937) On the theory of the therapeutic results of psychoanalysis. IJP, 18.
    82. Bibring, E. (1941) The conception of the repetition compulsion. PQ, 12.
    83. Bibring, E. (1953) The mechanism of depression. In: Affective Disorders, ed. P. Greenacre. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    84. Bibring, E. (1954) Psychoanalysis and the dynamic psychotherapies. JAPA, 2.
    85. Binswanger, H. (1963) Positive aspects of the animus. Zьrich: Spring.
    86. Bion Francesca Abingdon: Fleetwood Press.
    87. Bion, W. R. (1952) Croup dynamics. IJP, 33.
    88. Bion, W. R. (1961) Experiences in Groups. London: Tavistock.
    89. Bion, W. R. (1962) A theory of thinking. IJP, 40.
    90. Bion, W. R. (1962) Learning from Experience. London: William Heinemann.
    91. Bion, W. R. (1963) Elements of Psychoanalysis. London: William Heinemann.
    92. Bion, W. R. (1965) Transformations. London: William Heinemann.
    93. Bion, W. R. (1970) Attention and Interpretation. London: Tavistock.
    94. Bion, W. R. (1985) All My Sins Remembered, ed. Francesca Bion. Adingdon: Fleetwood Press.
    95. Bird, B. (1972) Notes on transference. JAPA, 20.
    96. Blanck, G. & Blanck, R. (1974) Ego Psychology. New York: Columbia Univ. Press.
    97. Blatt, S. J. (1974) Levels of object representation in anaclitic and introjective depression. PSOC, 29.
    98. Blau, A. (1955) A unitary hypothesis of emotion. PQ, 24.
    99. Bleuler, E. (1911) Dementia Praecox or the Group of Schizophrenias. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1951.
    100. Blos, P. (1954) Prolonged adolescence. Amer. J. Orthopsychiat., 24.
    101. Blos, P. (1962) On Adolescence. New York: Free Press.
    102. Blos, P. (1972) The epigenesia of the adult neurosis. 27.
    103. Blos, P. (1979) Modification in the traditional psychoanalytic theory of adolescent development. Adolescent Psychiat., 8.
    104. Blos, P. (1984) Son and father. JAPA_. 32.
    105. Blum, G. S. (1963) Prepuberty and adolescence, In Studies ed. R. E. Grinder. New York: McMillan.
    106. Blum, H. P. Symbolism. FMC. Forthcoming.
    107. Blum, H. P. (1976) Female Psychology. JAPA, 24 (suppl.).
    108. Blum, H. P. (1976) Masochism, the ego ideal and the psychology of women. JAPA, 24 (suppl.).
    109. Blum, H. P. (1980) The value of reconstruction in adult psychoanalysis. IJP, 61.
    110. Blum, H. P. (1981) Forbidden quest and the analytic ideal. PQ, 50.
    111. Blum, H. P. (1983) Defense and resistance. Foreword. JAFA, 31.
    112. Blum, H. P., Kramer, Y., Richards, A. K. & Richards, A. D., eds. (1988) Fantasy, Myth and Reality: Essays in Honor of Jacob A. Arlow. Madison, Conn.: Int. Univ. Press.
    113. Boehm, F. (1930) The femininity-complex In men. IJP,11.
    114. Boesky, D. Structural theory. PMC. Forthcoming.
    115. Boesky, D. (1973) Deja raconte as a screen defense. PQ, 42.
    116. Boesky, D. (1982) Acting out. IJP, 63.
    117. Boesky, D. (1986) Questions about Sublimation In Psychoanalysis the Science of Mental Conflict, ed. A. D. Richards & M. S. Willick. Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.
    118. Bornstein, B. (1935) Phobia in a 2 1/2-year-old child. PQ, 4.
    119. Bornstein, B. (1951) On latency. PSOC, 6.
    120. Bornstein, M., ed. (1983) Values and neutrality in psychoanalysis. Psychoanal. Inquiry, 3.
    121. Bowlby, J. (1960) Grief and morning in infancy and early childhood. PSOC. 15.
    122. Bowlby, J. (1961) Process of mourning. IJP. 42.
    123. Bowlby, J. (1980) Attachment and Loss, vol. 3. New York: Basic Books.
    124. Bradlow, P. A. (1973) Depersonalization, ego splitting, non-human fantasy and shame. IJP, 54.
    125. Brazelton, T. B., Kozlowsky, B. & Main, M. (1974) The early motherinfant interaction. In: The Effect of the Infant on Its Caregiver, ed. M. Lewis & L. Rosenblum New York Wiley.
    126. Brenner, C. (1957) The nature and development of the concept of repression in Freud's writings. PSOC, 12.
    127. Brenner, C. (1959) The masochistic character. JAPA, 7.
    128. Brenner, C. (1973) An Elementary Textbook of Psycho-analysis. New York Int. Univ. Press.
    129. Brenner, C. (1974) On the nature and development of affects PQ, 43.
    130. Brenner, C. (1976) Psychoanalytic Technique and Psychic Conflict. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    131. Brenner, C. (1979) The Mind in Conflict. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    132. Brenner, C. (1979) Working alliance, therapeutic alliance and transference. JAPA, 27.
    133. Brenner, C. (1981) Defense and defense mechanisms. PQ, 50.
    134. Brenner, C. (1983) Defense. In: the Mind in Conflict. New York Int. Univ. Press.
    135. Bressler, B. (1965) The concept of the self. Psychoanalytic Review, 52.
    136. Breuer, J. & Freud, S. (1983—95) Studies on Hysteria. SE, 3.
    137. Breznitz, S., ed. (1983) The Denial of Stress. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    138. Brody, S. (1964) Passivity. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    139. Brown, H. (1970) Psycholinquistics. New York: Free Press.
    140. Bruner, J. S. (1964) The course of cognitive growth. Amer. Psychologist. 19.
    141. Bruner, J., Jolly, A. & Sylva, K. (1976) Play. New York Basic Books.
    142. Bruner, J. E., Olver, R. R. &Greenfield, P. M. (1966) Studies in Cognitive Growth. New York: Wiley.
    143. Buie, D H. (1981) Empathy. JAPA, 29.
    144. Burgner, M. & Edgeumble, R. (1972) Some problems in the conceptualization of early object relationships. PSOC, 27.
    145. Call, J. ed. (1979) Basic Handbook of Child Psychiatry. New York: Basic Books.
    146. Carroll, G. (1956) Language, Thought and Reality. Cambridge & London: M. I. T. Press & John Wiley.
    147. Cavenar, J. O. & Nash, J. L. (1976) The effects of Combat on the normal personality. Comprehensive Psychiat., 17.
    148. Chassequet-Smirgel, J. (1978) Reflections on the connection between perversion and sadism. IJP, 59.
    149. Chomsky, N. (1978) Language and unconscious knowledge. In: Psychoanalysis and Language, ed. J. H. Smith. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press, vol. 3.
    150. Clower, V. (1975) Significance of masturbation in female sexual development and function. In: Masturbation from Infancy to Senescence, ed. I. Marcus & J. Francis. New York: Int. Uni" Press.
    151. Coen, S. J. & Bradlow, P. A. (1982) Twin transference as a compromise formation. JAPA, 30.
    152. Compton, A. Object and relationships. PMC. Forthcoming.
    153. Cullen, W. (1777) First Lines of the Practice of Psysic. Edinburgh: Bell, Brandfute.
    154. Curtis, B. C. (1969) Psychoanalytic understanding and treatment of impotence. In: Sexual Function and Dysfunction, ed. P. J. Fink & V. B. O. Hummett. Philadelphia: F. A. Davis.
    155. Darwin, C. (1874) The Descent of Man. New York: Hurst.
    156. Davidoff-Hirsch, H. (1985) Oedipal and preoedipal phenomena. JAPA, 33.
    157. Davis, M. & Wallbridge, D. (1981) Boundary and Space. New York: Brunner-Mazel.
    158. Deutsch, H. (1932) Homosexuality in women. PQ, 1.
    159. Deutsch, H. (1934) Some forms of emotional disturbance and their relationship to schizophrenia. PQ, 11.
    160. Deutsch, H. (1937) Absence of grief. PQ, 6.
    161. Deutsch, H. (1942) Some forms of emotional disturbance and their relationship to schizophrenia. PQ, 11.
    162. Deutsch, H. (1955) The impostor. In: Neuroses and Character Types. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1965.
    163. Devereux, G. (1953) Why Oedipus killed Lains. IJP, 34.
    164. Dewald, P. (1982) Psychoanalytic perspectives On resistance. In: resistance, Psychodynamics. and Behavioral Approaches, ed. P. Wachtel. New York: Plenum Press.
    165. Dickes, R. (1963) Fetishistic behavior. JAPA. 11.
    166. Dickes, R. (1965) The defensive function of an altered state of consciousness. JAPA, 13.
    167. Dickes, R. (1967) Severe regressive disruption of the therapeutic alliance. JAPA, 15.
    168. Dickes, R. (1981) Sexual myths and misinformation. In: Understanding Human Behaviour in Health and Illness, ed. R. C. Simon & H. Pardes. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.
    169. Dorpat, T. L. (1985) Denial and Defense in the Therapeutic Situation. New York: Jason Aronson.
    170. Downey, T. W. (1978) Transitional phenomena in the analysis of early adolescent males. PSOC, 33.
    171. Dunbar, F. (1954) Emotions and Bodily Functions. New York: Columbia Univ. Press.
    172. Easson, W. M. (1973) The earliest ego development, primitive memory traces, and the Isakower phenomenon. PQ, 42.
    173. Edelheit, H. (1971) Mythopoiesis and the primal scene. Psychoanal. Study Society, 5.
    174. Edgcumbe, R. & Burgner, M. (1972) Some problems in the conceptualization of early object relation ships, part I. PSOC, 27.
    175. Edgcumbe, R. & Burgner, M. (1975) The phallicnarcissistic phase. PSOC, 30.
    176. Eidelberg, L. (1960) A third contribution to the study of slips of the tongue. IJP, 41.
    177. Eidelberg, L. (1968) Encyclopedia of Psychoanalysis. New York: The Free Press; London: Collier-MacMillan.
    178. Eissler, K. R. (1953) The effect of the structure of the ego on psychoanalytic technique. JAPA, 1.
    179. Ellenberg, H. F. (1970) The Discovery of the Unconscious. New York: Basic Books.
    180. Emde, R. N. (1980) Toward a psychoanalytic theory of affect: I. & G. H. Pollock. Washington NYMH.
    181. Emde R., Gaensbaner, T. & Harmon R. (1976) Emotional Expression in Infancy. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    182. Erode R. & Harmon, R. J. (1972) Endogenous and exogenous smiling systems in early infancy. J. Amer. Acad. Child Psychiat., 11.
    183. Engel, G. L. (1962) Psychological Development in Health and Disease. New York Saunders.
    184. Engel, G. L. (1967) Psychoanalytic theory of somatic disorder. JAPA, 15.
    185. Engel, G. L. (1968) A reconsideration of the role of conversion in somatic disease. Compr. Psychiat., 94.
    186. English, H. B. & English, A. C. (1958) A comprehensive Dictionary of Psychological and Psychoanalytical Terms. New York: David McKay.
    187. Erard, R. (1983) New wine in old skins. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 10.
    188. Erdelyi, M. H. (1985) Psychoanalysis. New York: W. H. Freeman.
    189. Erikson, E. H. (1950) Childhood and Society. New York: Norton.
    190. Erikson, E. H. (1956) The concept of ego identity. JAPA, 4.
    191. Erikson, E. H. (1956) The problem of ego identity. JAPA, 4.
    192. Esman, A. H. (1973) The primal scene. PSOC, 28.
    193. Esman, A. H. (1975) The Psychology of Adolescence. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    194. Esman, A. H. (1979) Some reflections on boredom. JAPA, 27.
    195. Esman, A. H. (1983) The "stimulus barrier": a review and reconsideration. PSOC, 38.
    196. Fairbairn, W. R. D. (1952) Psychoanalytic Studies of the Personality. London: Routledge & Kegan Paul.
    197. Fairbairn, W. R. D. (1954) An Object-Relations Theory of the Personality. New York: Basic Books.
    198. Fairbairn, W. R. D. (1963) Synopsis of an Object-Relations theory of the personality. IJP, 44.
    199. Fawcett, J., Clark, D. C., Scheftner, W. H. & Hedecker, D. (1983) Differences between anhedonia and normal hedonic depressive states. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 40.
    200. Fenichel, O. (1934) On the psychology of boredom. Collected Papers. New York: Norton, 1953, vol. 1.
    201. Fenichel, O. (1941) Problems of Psychoanalytic Technique. Albany, N. Y.: Psychoanalytic Quaterly.
    202. Fenichel, O. (1945) Character disorders. In: The Psychoanalytic Theory of the Neurosis. New York: Norton.
    203. Fenichel, O. (1945) The Psychoanalytic Theory of Neurosis New York: Norton.
    204. Fenichel, O. (1954) Ego strength and ego weakness. Collected Papers. New York: Norton, vol. 2.
    205. Ferenczi, S. (1909) Introjection and transference. In: Sex in Psychoanalysis. New York: Basic Books.
    206. Ferenczi, S. (191617) Disease or patho-neurosis. The Theory and Technique of Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press, 1950.
    207. Ferenczi, S. (1925) Psychoanalysis of sexual habits. In: The Theory and Technique of Psychoanalysis. New York: Basic Books.
    208. Fine, B. D., Joseph, E. D. & Waldhorn, H. F., eds. (1971) Recollection and Reconstruction in Psychoanalysis. Monograph 4, Kris Study Group. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    209. Fink, G. (1967) Analysis of the Isakower phenomenon. JAPA, 15.
    210. Fink, P. J. (1970) Correlation between "actual" neurosis and the work of Masters and Johson. P. Q, 39.
    211. Finkenstein, L. (1975) Awe premature ejaculation. P. Q, 44.
    212. Firestein, S. K. (1978) A review of the literature. In: Termination in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    213. Fisher, C. et. al. (1957) A study of the preliminary stages of the construction of dreams and images. JAPA, 5.
    214. Fisher, C. et. al. (1968) Cycle of penile erection synchronous with dreaming (REM) sleep. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 12.
    215. Fliess, R. (1942) The metapsychology of the analyst. PQ, 12.
    216. Fliess, R. (1953) The Revival of Interest in the Dream. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    217. Fodor, N. & Gaynor, F. (1950) Freud: Dictionary of Psycho-analysis. New York: Philosophical Library.
    218. Fordham, M. (1969) Children as Individuals. London: Hodder & Stoughton.
    219. Fordham, M. (1976) The Self and Autism. London: Academic Press.
    220. Fraiberg, S. (1969) Object constancy and mental representation. PSOC, 24.
    221. Frank, A. Metapsychology. PMS. Forthcoming.
    222. Frank, A. & Muslin, H. (1967) The development of Freud's concept of primal repression. PSOC, 22.
    223. Frank, H. (1977) Dynamic patterns for failure in college students. Can. Psychiat. Ass. J., 22.
    224. French, T. & Fromm, E. (1964) Dream Interpretation. New York: Basic Books.
    225. Freud, A. (1936) The Ego and the Mechanisms of Defense. New York Int. Univ. Press.
    226. Freud, A. (1951) Observations on child development. PSOC, 6.
    227. Freud, A. (1952) The mutual influences in the development of ego and id. WAF, 4.
    228. Freud, A. (1958) Adolescence. WAF, 5.
    229. Freud, A. (1962) Assessment of childhood disturbances. PSOC, 17.
    230. Freud, A. (1962) Comments on psychic trauma. In: Furst (1967).
    231. Freud, A. (1963) The concept of developmental lines. PSOC, 18.
    232. Freud, A. (1965) Assessment of pathology, part 2. WAF, 6.
    233. Freud, A. (1965) Normality and Pathology in Childhood. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    234. Freud, A. (1970) The infantile neurosis. WAF, 7.
    235. Freud, A. (1971) Comments on aggression. IJP, 53.
    236. Freud, A. (1971) The infantile neurosis. PSOC, 26.
    237. Freud, A. (1981) Insight. PSOC, 36.
    238. Freud, S. (1887—1902) Letters to Wilhelm Fliess. New York: Basic Books, 1954.
    239. Freud, S. (1891) On the interpretation of the aphasias. SE, 3.
    240. Freud, S. (1893—95) Studies on hysteria. SE, 2.
    241. Freud, S. (1894) The neuropsychoses of defence. SE, 3.
    242. Freud, S. (1895) On the ground for detaching a particular syndrome from neurasthenia under the description "anxiety neurosis". SE, 3.
    243. Freud, S. (1895) Project for a scientific psychology. SE, 1.
    244. Freud, S. (1896) Draft K, Jameary 1, 1896, Neuroses of defense (A Christmas fairytale). In: Extracts from the Fliess papers (1892—99).
    245. Freud, S. (1896) Further remarks on the neuropsychosis of defense. SE, 3.
    246. Freud, S. (1896) Heredity and aetiology of neurosis. SE, 3.
    247. Freud, S. (1898) Sexuality in the aetiology of the neurosis. SE, 3.
    248. Freud, S. (1899) Screen memories. SE, 3.
    249. Freud, S. (1900) The interpretation of dreams. SE, 4—5.
    250. Freud, S. (1901) Childhood memories and screen memories SE, 6.
    251. Freud, S. (1901) On dreams. SE, 5.
    252. Freud, S. (1901) The psychopathology of everyday life. SE, 6.
    253. Freud, S. (1905) Fragments of an analysis of a case of hysteria. SE, 7.
    254. Freud, S. (1905) Jokes and their relation to the unconscious. SE, 8.
    255. Freud, S. (1905) Psysical (or mental) treatment. SE, 7.
    256. Freud, S. (1905) Three essays on the theory of sexuality. SE. 7.
    257. Freud, S. (1908) Character and anal erotism. SE, 9.
    258. Freud, S. (1908) On the sexual theories of children. SE, 9.
    259. Freud, S. (1908) Preface to Wilhelm Stekel's Nervous Anxiety-States and Their Treatment. SE, 9.
    260. Freud, S. (1909) Analysis of a phobia in a five-year-old boy. SE, 10.
    261. Freud, S. (1909) Family romances. SE, 9.
    262. Freud, S. (1909) Notes upon a case of obsessional neurosis. SE, 10.
    263. Freud, S. (1910) A special type of choice of object made by men. SE, 11.
    264. Freud, S. (1910) The autithentical meaning of primal words. SE, 11.
    265. Freud, S. (1910) The future prospects of psychoanalytic therapy. SE, 11.
    266. Freud, S. (1910) The psychoanalytic view of psychogenic disturbance of vision. SE, 11.
    267. Freud, S. (1911) Formulations on the two principles of mental functioning. SE, 12.
    268. Freud, S. (1911) Notes on a case of paranoia. SE, 12.
    269. Freud, S. (1911) Psychoanalytic notes on an autobiographical account of a case of paranoia. SE, 12.
    270. Freud, S. (1911—15) Papers on technique. SE, 12.
    271. Freud, S. (1912) Contribution to a discussion on masturbation. SE, 12.
    272. Freud, S. (1912) On the universal tendency to abasement in the sphere of love. SE, 11.
    273. Freud, S. (1912) The dynamics of transference. SE, 12.
    274. Freud, S. (1913) Editor's note The disposition to obsessional neurosis. SE, 12.
    275. Freud, S. (1913) On beginning the treatment. SE, 12.
    276. Freud, S. (1913) Totem and taboo. SE, 13.
    277. Freud, S. (1914) Fausse reconnaissance (deja reconte) in psychoanalytic treatment. SE, 13.
    278. Freud, S. (1914) Mourning and melancholia. SE, 15.
    279. Freud, S. (1914) Observations on transference love. SE, 12.
    280. Freud, S. (1914) On narcissism. SE. 14.
    281. Freud, S. (1914) On the history of the psychoanalytic movement. SE, 14.
    282. Freud, S. (1914) Remembering, repeating, and working-through. SE, 12.
    283. Freud, S. (1914—16) Some character types met with in psychoanalysis. (II) Those wrecked by success SE, 14.
    284. Freud, S. (1915) Das UnbewuЯte. Gesammelte Werke, 10.
    285. Freud, S. (1915) Instincts and their vicissitudes. SE, 14.
    286. Freud, S. (1915) Observation on transference-love. SE, I2.
    287. Freud, S. (1915) Repression. SE, 14.
    288. Freud, S. (1915) The unconscious. SE, 14.
    289. Freud, S. (1915—17) Introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 15 & 16.
    290. Freud, S. (1916) Introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 16.
    291. Freud, S. (1916) Some character types met with in psychoanalytic work. SE, 16.
    292. Freud, S. (1917) A metapsychological supplement to the theory of dreams. SE, 14.
    293. Freud, S. (1917) Introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 16.
    294. Freud, S. (1917) Mourning and melancholia. SE, 14.
    295. Freud, S. (1917) On transformations of instinct as exemplified in anal erotism. SE, 17.
    296. Freud, S. (1918) From the history of an infantile neurosis. SE, 17.
    297. Freud, S. (1919) "A child is being beaten". SE, 17.
    298. Freud, S. (1919) Lines of advance in psychoanalytic therapy. SE, 17.
    299. Freud, S. (1919) The uncanny. SE, 17.
    300. Freud, S. (1920) Beyond the pleasure principle. SE, 18.
    301. Freud, S. (1920) The Psychogenesis of a case of homosexuality in a woman. SE, 18.
    302. Freud, S. (1921) Group psychology and the analysis of the ego. SE, 18.
    303. Freud, S. (1923) The ego and the id. SE, 19.
    304. Freud, S. (1923) The infantile genital organization. SE, 19.
    305. Freud, S. (1924) A short account of psychoanalysis. SE, 19.
    306. Freud, S. (1924) Neurosis and psychosis. SE, 19.
    307. Freud, S. (1924) The dissolution of the Oedipus complex SE, 19.
    308. Freud, S. (1924) The economic problem of masochism. SE, 19.
    309. Freud, S. (1924) The loss of reality in neurosis and psychosis. SE, 19.
    310. Freud, S. (1925) Negation. SE, 19.
    311. Freud, S. (1925) Some psychical consequences of the anatomical distinction between the sexes. SE, 19.
    312. Freud, S. (1926) Inhibitions, symptoms and anxiety. SE, 20.
    313. Freud, S. (1926) The question of lay analysis. SE, 20.
    314. Freud, S. (1927) Fetishism. SE, 21.
    315. Freud, S. (1930) Civilization and its discontents. SE, 21.
    316. Freud, S. (1931) Female sexuality. SE, 21.
    317. Freud, S. (1931) Libidinal types. SE, 21.
    318. Freud, S. (1933) Femininity. SE, 22,.
    319. Freud, S. (1933) New introductory lectures on psycho-analysis. SE, 22.
    320. Freud, S. (1933) The psychology of women. New introductory lectures on psychoanalysis. SE, 22.
    321. Freud, S. (1936) A disturbance of memory on the Acropolis. SE, 22.
    322. Freud, S. (1937) Analysis terminable and interminable. SE, 23.
    323. Freud, S. (1937) Constructions in analysis. SE, 23.
    324. Freud, S. (1938) An outline on psychoanalysis. SE, 23.
    325. Freud, S. (1938) Splitting of the ego in the process of defense. SE, 23.
    326. Freud, S. (1939) Moses and monotheism. SE, 23.
    327. Freud, S. (1940) An outline of psychoanalysis. SE, 23.
    328. Frosch, J. (1966) A note on reality constancy. In: Psychoanalysis — A General Psychology, ed. R. M. Loewenstein, L. M. Newman, M. Schur & A. J. Solnit. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    329. Frosch, J. (1967) Delusional fixity sense of conviction and the psychotic conflict. IJP, 48.
    330. Frosch, J. (1977) The relation between acting out and disorders of impulse control. Psychiatry, 40.
    331. Frosch, J. (1980) Neurosis and psychosis. In: The Course of Life, ed. S. J. Greenspan & G. H. Pollock. Washington, D. C.: National Institute of Health, vol. 3.
    332. Frosch, J. (1983) The Psychotic Process. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    333. Furer, M. (1972) The history of the superego concept in psychoanalysis. In: Moral Value and the Superego concept in Psychoanalysis, ed. S. C. Fost. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    334. Furman, E. (1974) A Child s Parent Dies. New Heaven: Yale Univ. Press.
    335. Furman, E. (1980) Transference and externalization. PSOC, 35.
    336. Furst, S. Trauma. PMC, Forthcoming.
    337. Furst, S. (1967) Psychic trauma. In: Psychic Trauma, ed. S. S. Furst. New York: Basic Books.
    338. Furst, S. (1978) The stimulus barrier and the pathogenecity of trauma. IJP, 59.
    339. Gaddini, R. (1978) Transitional object and the psychosomatic symptom. In: Grolnich et. al. (1978).
    340. Galenson, E. & Roiphe, H. (1976) Some suggested revisions concerning early female development. JAPA, 24(5).
    341. Galenson, E. & Roiphe, H. (1980) The preoedipal development of the boy. JAPA, 28.
    342. Galenson, E. & Roiphe, H. (1981) Infantile Origins of Sexual Identity. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    343. Ganzarain, R. Group psychology. PMC. Forthcoming.
    344. Ganzarain, R. (1980) Psychotic-like anxieties and primitive defenses. Issues on Ego Psychology, 3(2).
    345. Ganzarain, R. (1988) A comparative study of Bion's concepts about groups. In: Object Relations Group Psychotherapy. Madison, Ct.: Int. Univ. Press.
    346. Gediman, H. K. (1971) The concept of the stimulus barrier. IJP, 52.
    347. Gedo, J. & Goldberg, A. (1973) Models of the Mind. Chicago & London: Univ. of Chicago Press.
    348. Geerts, A. E. & Prechardt, E., reporters (1978) Colloquium on "trauma". IJP, 59.
    349. Gero, G. (1943) The idea of psychogenesis in modern psychiatry and in psychoanalysis. Psychoanal. Rev., 30.
    350. Gill. M. M. (1963) Topography and Systems in Psychoanalytic Theory. Psychol. Issues, Monogr. 10. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    351. Gill. M. M. (1967) The primary process in motives and thought. In: Motives and Thought, ed. R. R. Holt. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    352. Gill. M. M. (1974) Psychoanalysis and psychotherapy. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 11.
    353. Gill, M. M & Rapaport, D. (1942) A case of amnesia and its bearing on the theory of memory. Character and Personality, 11.
    354. Gillespie, W. (1956) The general theory of Sexual perversion. IJP, 37.
    355. Glenn, J. (in press) A parameter. In: Annu. Psychoanal.
    356. Glenn, J. & Kaplan, E. H. (1968) Types of orgasm in women. JAPA, 16.
    357. Glower, E. (1929) The "screening" function of traumatic memories. IJP, 4.
    358. Glower, E. (1931) Sublimation, substitution, and social anxiety. IJP, 12.
    359. Glower, E. (1933) The relation of perversion-formation to the development of reality sense. IJP, 14.
    360. Glower, E. (1955) The terminal phase. In: The Technique of Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    361. Goldberg, A. (1975) The evolution of psychoanalytic concepts of depression. In: Depression and Human Existence, ed. E. J. Anthony & T. Benedeck. Boston: Little, Brown.
    362. Goldberg, A. ed. (1978) The Psychology of the Self. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    363. Goldberg, A. (1983) Self psychology and alternate perspectives on internalization. In: Reflections on Self Psychology, ed. J. Lichtenberg & S. Kaplan. Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.
    364. Green, A. (1978) Potential space in Psychoanalysis. In: Grolnich et. al. (1978).
    365. Greenacre, P. (1949) A contribution to the study of screen memories. FSOC, 3/4.
    366. Greenacre, P. (1950) General problems of acting out. PQ, 19.
    367. Greenacre, P. (1950) Special problems of early female sexual development. In: Trauma, Growth and Personality New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    368. Greenacre, P. (1952) Pregenital patterning. IJP, 33.
    369. Greenacre, P. (1953) Penis awe and its relation to penis envy. In: Drives, Affects, Behavior, ed. R. M. Loewenstein. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    370. Greenacre, P. (1956) Experiences of awe in childhood. PSOC,11.
    371. Greenacre, P. (1957) The childhood of the artist. PSOC, 12.
    372. Greenacre, P. (1958) The family romance of the artist. In: Emotional Growth. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1971, vol. 2.
    373. Greenacre, P. (1958) The relation of the impostor to the artist. In: Emotional Growth. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1971, vol. 1.
    374. Greenacre, P. (1968) Perversions. PSOC, 23.
    375. Greenacre, P. (1969) The fetish and the transitional object, part 1. PSOC, 24.
    376. Greenacre, P. (1970) The fetish and the transitional object, part 2. IJP 51, vol. 4.
    377. Greenacre, P. (1970) The transitional object and the fetish. In: Emotional Growth. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    378. Greenacre, P. (1972) Crowds and crisis. PSOC, 27.
    379. Greenacre, P. (1973) The primal scene and the sense of reality. PQ, 42.
    380. Greenacre, P. (1975) On reconstruction. JAPA, 21.
    381. Greenberg, J. R. & Mitchell, S. A. (1983) Object Relations in Psychoanalytic Theory. Cambridge: Harvard Univ. Press.
    382. Greenson, R. R. (1949) The psychology of apathy. PQ, 18.
    383. Greenson, R. R. (1953) On boredom. JAPA, 1.
    384. Greenson, R. R. (1960) Empathy and its vicissitudes. IJP, 41.
    385. Greenson, R. R. (1962) On enthusiasm. JAPA, 10.
    386. Greenson, R. R. (1965) The working alliance and the transference neurosis. PQ, 34.
    387. Greenson, R. R. (1967) The technique and Practice of Psycho-analysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    388. Greenson, R. R. (1978) Exploration in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    389. Greenspan, S. & Pollock, G., eds. (1980) The Course of Life. Vol. I. Washington, D. C.: U. S. Government Printing office.
    390. Grinberg, L., Sor, D. & Tabak de Bianchedi, E. (1975) Introduction to the Work of Bion, trans. A. Hahn. Scotland: Clunie Press.
    391. Grinker, E. R (1945) Psychiatric disorders in combat crews overseas and in returnees. Med. Clin. North. Amer., 29.
    392. Grinstein, A. (1983) Freud's Rules of Dream Interpretation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    393. Grolnick, S., Barkin, L. & Muensterberger, W., eds. (1978) Between Reality and Fantasy. New York: Jason Aronson.
    394. Grosskurth, P. (1986) Melanie Klein. New York: Alfred Knopf.
    395. Grossman, W. E. & Stewart, W. A. (1976) Penis envy. JAPA, 24 (5).
    396. Grotstein, J. S. (1981) Splitting and Projective Indentification. New York: Jason Aronson.
    397. Guntrip, H. (1961) Personality Structure and Human Interaction. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    398. Guntrip, H. (1968) Schizoid Phenomena, Object-Relations and the Self. London: Hogarth Press.
    399. Harley, M. (1967) Transference developments in a five-year old child. In: the Child Analyst at Work, ed. E. Geleerd. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    400. Harley, M. (1974) Analyst and Adolescent at Work. New York: Quadrangle.
    401. Harley, M. (1986) Child analysis, 1947—1984, a retrospective. PSOC, 41.
    402. Harre, R. and Lamb, R. (1983) The Encyclopedia Dictionary of Psychology. Cambridge: M. I. T. Press.
    403. Harrison, J. B. (1975) On the maternal origins of awe. PSOC, 30.
    404. Harrison, J. B. (1979) On Freud's view of the infant-mother relationship and of the oceanic feeling. JAPA, 27.
    405. Harrison, S. J. (1970) Is psychoanalysis "our science?". JAPA, 18.
    406. Hartmann, H. PSOC, 5.
    407. Hartmann, H. (1937) Ego Psychology and the Problem of Adaptation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    408. Hartmann, H. (1939) Ego Psychology and the Problem of Adaptation. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1958.
    409. Hartmann, H. (1939) Psychoanalysis and the concept of health. In: Hartmann (1964).
    410. Hartmann, H. (1947) On rational and irrational action. In: Essays on Ego Psychology. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1964.
    411. Hartmann, H. (1948) Comments on the theory of instinctual drives. PQ, 17.
    412. Hartmann, H. (1950) Comments on the psychoanalytic theory of the ego. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    413. Hartmann, H. (1951) Technical implications of ego psychology PQ, 20.
    414. Hartmann, H. (1952) The mutual influences in the development of ego and id. PSOC, 7.
    415. Hartmann, H. (1953) Contribution to the metapsychology of schizophrenia. In: Hartmann, PSOC, 8.
    416. Hartmann, H. (1953) The metapsychology of schizophrenia. PSOC, 8.
    417. Hartmann, H. (1955) Notes on the theory of sublimation. PSOC, 10.
    418. Hartmann, H. (1956) The development of the ego concept in Freud's work. IJP, 37.
    419. Hartmann, H. (1964) Essays in Ego Psychology. New York Int. Univ. Press.
    420. Hartmann, H. (1964) The development of the ego concept in Freud's work. IJP, 37.
    421. Hartmann, H., Kris, E. & Loewenstein, R. M. (1946) Comments in the formation of psychic structure. PSOC, 2.
    422. Hartmann, H., Kris, E. & Loewenstein, R. M. (1949) Notes on the theory of aggression. PSOC, 3/4.
    423. Hartmann, H. & Loewenstein, R. M. (1962) Notes on the superego. PSOC, 17.
    424. Hassler, A. D. (1960) Guideposts of migrating fish. Science, 122.
    425. Hastings, D. W. (1963) Impotence and Frigidity. Boston: Little, Brown.
    426. Heimann, P. (1952) Certain functions of introjection and projection in early infancy. In: Klein et al. (1952).
    427. Heimann, P. & Valenstein, A. F. (1962) Notes on the anal stage IJP, 43.
    428. Heimann, P. & Valenstein, A. F. (1972) The psychoanalytical concept of aggression. IJP, 53.
    429. Hendrick, I. (1958) Facts and Theories of Psychoanalysis, 3rd ed. New York: Alfred Knopf.
    430. Hill, M. (1982) Analysis of transference. In: Theory and Technique, vol. 1. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    431. Hoffer, W. (1949) Mouth, hand, and ego integration. PSOC, 3/4.
    432. Holder, A. (1982) Preoedipal contributions to the formation of the superego. PSOC, 37.
    433. Holt, R. R. (1964) The emergence of cognitive psychology JAPA, 12.
    434. Holt, R. R. (1967) Beyond vitalism and mechanism. In: Science and Psychoanalysis, ed. J. H. Masserman. Hew York: Grune & Stratton, vol. 2.
    435. Hook, S. (1959) Psychoanalysis, Scientific Method and Philosophy. New York: Grove Press.
    436. Horney, K. (1924) On the genesis of the castration complex in women. IJP, 5.
    437. Horney, K. (1926) The flight from womanhood. IJP, 7.
    438. Horowitz, M. J. (1972) Modes of representation of thought. JAFA, 20.
    439. Horowitz, M. J. (1979) States of Mind, 2d. ed. New York: Plenum, 1987, chap. 3.
    440. Hurvich, M. (1970) On the concept of reality testing. IJP, 51.
    441. Isaacs, S. (1952) The nature and function of phantasy. In: Klein et. al. (1952).
    442. Isakower, O. (1938) A contribution to the pathopsychology of phenomena associated with falling asleep. IJP, 19.
    443. Isakower, O. (1963) Minutes of the faculty meeting. New York Psychoanalytic Institute, Oct. 14—Nov. 20. A. Z. Pteffer, reporter.
    444. Isay, R. A. (1986) Homosexuality in homosexual and heterosexual men. In: The Psychology of Men, ed. G. Fogel, F. Lane & R. Liebert. New York: Basic Books.
    445. Jacobi, J. (1959) Complex (Archetype) Symbol in the Work of C. G. Jung. Princeton, N. J.: Princeton Univ. Press.
    446. Jacobs, T. J. (1986) Transference relationships, relationships between transferences and reconstruction. In: Psycho-analysis, the Science of Mental Conflict, ed. A. D. Richards & M. S. Willick. Hillsdale N. J.: Analytic Press.
    447. Jacobson, E. (1953) Contribution to the metapsychology of cyclothymic depression. In: Affective Disorders, ed. P. Greenacre. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    448. Jacobson, E. (1954) Contribution to the metapsychology of psychotic identifications. JAPA, 2.
    449. Jacobson, E. (1957) Normal and pathological moods. PSOC, 12.
    450. Jacobson, E. (1959) Depersonalization. JAPA, 7.
    451. Jacobson, E. (1964) The Self and the Object World. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    452. Jacobson, E. (1967) Psychotic Conflict and Reality. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    453. Jacobson, E. (1971) Depression. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    454. Jacobson, E. (1971) Depression: Comparative Studies of Normal, Neurotic and Psychotic Conditions. Madison, Conn.: Int. Univ. Press.
    455. Jacobson, E. (1971) Normal and pathological moods. In: Depression. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    456. Jacobson, E. (1975) The regulation of self-esteem. In: Depression and Human Existence. ed. E. J. Anthony & T. Benedeck. Boston: Little, Brown.
    457. Jaffe, A. (1971) The Myth of Meaning. New York: Putnam.
    458. Jaffe, D. S. (1970) Forgetting and remembering. P. Q, 39.
    459. Janet, Dr. Pierre (1924) Principles of Psychotherapy. New York: Macmillan.
    460. John, E. R. (1976) A model of consciousness. In: Consciousness and Self-Regulation, ed. G. E. Schwartz & D. Shapiro. New York: Plenum Press, 1976, vol. 1.
    461. Jones, E. (1908) Rationalization in everyday life J Abnorm. Psychol., 3: 161—169.
    462. Jones, E. (1918) Anal-erotic character traits. In: Papers on Psychoanalysis London— Balliere Tindall & Cox, 1948.
    463. Jones, E. (1931) The concept of a normal mind. In: Papers on Psychoanalysis, 5th ed., London. Bailliйre, Tindall & Cox, 1948.
    464. Jones, E. (1933) The phallic phase. IJP, 14.
    465. Jones, E. (1934) Editorial preface to the Collected Papers of Sigmund Freud, 4. London— Hogarth Press.
    466. Jones, E. (1941) Evolution and revolution. IJP, 22.
    467. Jones, E. (1949) Hamlet and Oedipus. New York: Norton.
    468. Jones, E. (1957) The life and work of Sigmund Freud, vol. 3. New York: Basic Books.
    469. Joseph, E. D. (1965) Regressive Ego Phenomena in Psychoanalysis. Monograph I, Kris Study Group. New York Int. Univ. Press.
    470. Joseph, E. D. (1966) Memory and conflict. PQ, 35.
    471. Joseph, E. D. & Wallerstein, R. S (1982) Psychotherapy. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    472. Jung, C. G. (1921—57) Collected Works of C. G. Jung Princeton, N. J.: Princeton Univ. Press.
    473. Jung, C. G. (1938) Psychological aspects of the mother archetype. In: Collected Works, vol. 9, pt. 1.
    474. Jung, C. G. (1957) Animus and Anima. Zurich: Spring.
    475. Jung, C. G. (1963) Memories Dreams, Reflections. New York Pantheon.
    476. Kamyer, M. (1985) Identification and its vicissitudes. IJP, 66.
    477. Kandell, E (1976) Cellular Basis of Behavior. San Francisco— W H. Freeman.
    478. Kanzer, M. (1948) The passing of the Oedipus complex' in Greek drama. IJP, 29.
    479. Kanzer, M. (1964) On interpreting the Oedipus plays Psychoanal Study Society, 3.
    480. Kanzer, M. (1981) Freud's "analytic pact". JAPA, 29.
    481. Kardiner, A. (1941) The Traumatic Neurosis of War New. York: Hoeber.
    482. Karma, L. (1981) A clinical report of penis envy. JAPA, 29.
    483. Karush, A., Daniels, C. E., Flood, C. & O'Connor, J. F. (1977) Psychotherapy in Chronic Ulcerative Colitis. Philadelphia: Sannders.
    484. Katan, A. (1972) The infant's first reaction to strangers. IJP, 53.
    485. Katan, M. (1940) The role of the word in mania. Bull. Phi la. Assn. Psychoanal., 22.
    486. Katz, J. (1963) On primary gain and secondary gain. PSOC, 18.
    487. Katz, J. (1985) Book review of Melanie Klein by Hanna Segal. New York: Viking Press. 1980 JAPA, 33 (suppl.).
    488. Kaywin, L. (1966) Problems of sublimation. JAPA, 14.
    489. Kernberg, O. F. (1966) Structural derivations of object relationships. IJP, 47.
    490. Kernberg, O. F. (1967) Borderline personality organization. JAPA, 15.
    491. Kernberg, O. F. (1975) Borderline Conditions and Pathological Narcissism. New York: Jason Aronson.
    492. Kernberg, O. F. (1976) Object Relations Theory and Clinical Psychoanalysis. New York: Jason Aronson.
    493. Kernberg, O. F. (1977) Boundaries and structure in love relations. JAPA, 25.
    494. Kernberg, O. F. (1980) Fairbairn's theory and challenge. In: Internal World and External Reality: Object Relations Theory Applied. New York: Jason Aronson.
    495. Kernberg, O. F. (1980) Internal World and External Reality. New York: Jason Aronson.
    496. Kernberg, O. F. (1984) Severe Personality Disorders. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.
    497. Kessler, J. W. (1970) Contributions of the mentally retarded toward a theory of cognitive development. In: Cognitive Studies, ed. J. Hellmuth. New York Brunner/Mazel.
    498. Kestenberg, J. S. (1967) Phases of adolescence. J. Amer. Acad. Child. Psychiat., 6.
    499. Khan, M. (1982) Introduction. In: D. W. Winnicott, Through Paediatrics to Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.
    500. Klein, G. S. (1966) The several grades of memory. In: Psychoanalysis. A General Psychology, pd. H. M. Lowenstein, L M. Newman, M. Schur & A. J. Solnit. New York Int. Univ. Press.
    501. Klein, M. (1932) The Psychoanalysis of Children London: Hogarth Press.
    502. Klein, M. (1946) Notes on some schizoid mechanisms IJP, 27.
    503. Klein, M. (1948) Contributions to Psychoanalysis, 1921—45. London: Hogarth Press.
    504. Klein, M. (1950) Narrative of a Child Analysis. New York Basic Books.
    505. Klein, M. (1957) Envy and Gratitude. New York: Basic Books.
    506. Klein, M. (1957) On identification. In: New Directions in Psychoanalysis, ed. M. Klein, P. Heimann & R. Money-Kyrle. New York: Basic Books.
    507. Klein, M. (1959) On the development of Mental functioning. In: Envy and Gratitude London: Delacorte Press, 1975.
    508. Klein, M., Heimann, P., Isaacs, S. & Riviere J. (eds.) (1952) Developments in Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.
    509. Knight, R. P. (1953) Borderline states. Bull. Menn. Clin., 17.
    510. Knight, R. P. (1972) Clinician and Therapist: Selected Papers of Robert P. Knight, ed. Stuart C. Miller. New York: Basic Books.
    511. Kohut, H. (1959) Introspection, empathy, and psycho-analysis. JAPA, 7.
    512. Kohut, H. (1971) The Analysis of the Self. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    513. Kohut, H. (1977) The Restoration of the Self. New York Int. Univ. Press.
    514. Kohut, H. (1978) The Search for the Self, ed. P. Ornstein. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    515. Kohut, H. (1984) How Does Analysis Cure? ed. A Goldben & P. Stepansky. Chicago: Univ. Chicago Press.
    516. Kohut, H. & Wolf, E. S. (1978) The disorders of the self and their treatment. IJP, 59.
    517. Krapf, E. E. (1961) The concept of normality and mental, health in psychoanalysis. IJP, 59.
    518. Kreisler, L. (1984) Fundamentals for a psychosomatic pathology of infants. In: Frontiers of Infant Psychiatry, ed. J. D. Call, E. Galenson & R. L. Tyson. New York: Basic Books, vol. 2.
    519. Kris, A. O. (1982) Free Association. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.
    520. Kris, A. O. (1984) The conflicts of ambivalence. PSOC, 39.
    521. Kris, E. (1951) Ego psychology and interpretation in psychoanalytic therapy. P. Q, 20.
    522. Kris, E. (1952) Psychoanalytic Exploration in Art. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    523. Kris, E. (1956) On some vicissitudes of insight in psychoanalysis. IJP, 37.
    524. Kris, E. (1956) The personal myth. JAPA, 4.
    525. Kris, E. (1956) The recovery of childhood memories in psychoanalysis. PSOC, 11.
    526. Krupuick, J. L. & Horowitz, M. J. (1981) Stress response syndromes. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 38.
    527. Krystal, H. ed. (1968) Massive Psychic Trauma. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    528. Krystal, H. (1978) Trauma and affects. PSOC, 33.
    529. Krystal, H. (1981) The hedonic element in affectivity. J. Psychoanal., 9.
    530. Krystal, H. (1982) Alexithymia and the affectiveness of psychoanalytic treatment. Int. J. Psychoanal. Psychother., 9.
    531. Kubie, L. S. (1947) The fallacious use of quantitative concepts in dynamic psychology. P. Q, 16.
    532. Kubie, L. S. (1962) The fallacious misuse of the concept of sublimation. PQ, 31.
    533. Kubie, L. S. (1972) Personal communication.
    534. Kubie, L. S. (1975) The language tools of psychoanalysis. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 2.
    535. Labov, W. (1972) Language in the Inner City. Philadelphia: Univ. Penn. Press.
    536. Lagache, D. (1953) Behavior and psychoanalytic experience In Drives. Affects, Behavior, ed. R. Loewenstein. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    537. Langer, S. K. (1962) Problems and techniques of psychoanalytic validation and progress. In: Psychoanalysis as Science, ed. E. Pumplan-Mindlin. Stanford: Stanford Univ. Press.
    538. Langer, W. (1958) The next assignment. Amer. Imago, 15.
    539. Langhlin, H. P. (1967) The Neurosis. Washington: Butterworth.
    540. Laplanche, J. & Pontalis, J. B. (1967) Vocabulaire de la Psychoanalyse. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France.
    541. Laplanche, J. & Pontalis, J. B. (1973) The Language of Psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.
    542. Laplanche, J. & Pontalis, J. B. (1983) The Language of psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press.
    543. Laseque, C. (1977) Les exhibitionnistes. L'Union Medicale, Froisieme Serie, 23.
    544. Leaff, L. A. (1971) Affect versus feeling. JAPA, 19.
    545. Leon, I. G. (1984) Psychoanalysis, Piaget and attachment. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 11.
    546. Lerner, H. E. (1976) Parental Mislabeling of female genitals as a determinant of penis envy and learning inhibitions in women. JAPA, 24 (suppl.).
    547. Levey, M. (1985) The concept structure in psychoanalysis. Annu. Psychoanal. 12—13.
    548. Levy, D. (1983) Wittgenstein on the form of psychoanalytic interpretation. Int. Rev. Psycho-anal., 10.
    549. Levy, S. T. (1984) Principles of Interpretaion. New York: Aronson.
    550. Levy, S. T. (1984) Psychoanalytic perspectives on emptiness. JAPA, 32.
    551. Levy, S. T. (1985) Empathy and psychoanalytic technique. JAPA, 33.
    552. Lewin, B. D. (1933) The body as phallus. PQ, 2.
    553. Lewin, B. D. (1946) Sleep, the mouth, and the dream screen. PQ, 15.
    554. Lewin, B. D. (1950) The Psychoanalysis of Elation. New York: Norton.
    555. Lewin, B. D. (1953) Reconslde ration of the dream screen. PQ, 22.
    556. Lewis, H. B. (1971) Shame and Guilt in Neurosis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    557. Lichtenberg, J., Bornstein, M. & Silver, D., eds. (1984) Empathy, vols. 1—2. Hillsdale & London: Analytic Press.
    558. Lichtenberg, J. D. & Kaplan, S. (1983) Reflections on Self Psychology. Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.
    559. Lichtenberg, J. D. & Slap, J. W. (1973) Notes on the concept of splitting and defense mechanism of splitting of representations. JAPA, 21.
    560. Lichtenstein, H. (1961) Identity and sexuality. JAPA, 9.
    561. Lichtenstein, H. (1970) Changing implications of the concept of psychosexual development. JAPA, 18.
    562. Lidz, T., Fleck, S. & Cornelison. A. R. (1965) Schizophrenia and the Family. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    563. Lifschutz, J. E. (1976) A critique of reporting and assessment in the training analysis. JAPA, 24.
    564. Limentani, A. (1979) The significance of transsexualism in relation to some basic psychoanalytic concepts. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 6.
    565. Loewald, H. W. (1951) Ego and reality. IJP, 32.
    566. Loewald, H. W. (1959) The waning of the Oedipus complex. JAPA, 27.
    567. Loewald, H. W. (1962) Internalization, separation, mourning, and the superego. PQ, 31.
    568. Loewald, H. W. (1971) Some considerations on repetition and repetition compulsion. IJP, 52.
    569. Loewald, H. W. (1973) On internalization. IJP, 54.
    570. Loewenstein, R. M. (1951—72) Practice and Precept in Psycho analytic Technique. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press, 1982.
    571. Loewenstein, R. M. (1951) The problem of interpretation. PQ, 20.
    572. Loewenstein, R. M. (1957) A contribution to the psychoanalytic theory of masochism. JAPA, 5.
    573. Loewenstein, R. M., Newman, L. M., Schur, M. & Solnit, A. J., eds. (1966) Psychoanalysis — A General Psychology. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    574. Lorand, S. (1950) Clinical Studies in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    575. Lowinger, J. (1976) Ego Development. San Francisco: Jossey Bass.
    576. Luria, A. R. (1978) The human brain and conscious activity. In: Consciousness and Self-Regulation, ed. G. E. Shwarta & D. Shapiro. New York: Plenum Press, 1978, vol. 2.
    577. Lustman, J. (1977) On splitting. PSOC, 32.
    578. Lynd, H. M. (1961) On Shame and the Search for Identity New York: Science Editions.
    579. Madow, Z. & Snow, L. H., eds. (1970) The Psychodynamic Implications of the Physiological Studies on Dreams. Springfield, III: Thomas.
    580. Mahler, M. S. (1952) On child psychosis and schizophrenia. PSOC, 7.
    581. Mahler, M. S. (1963) Thoughts and development and individuation. PSOC. 12.
    582. Mahler, M. S. (1966) Notes on the development of basic moods: the depressive affect in psychoanalysis. In: Psychoanalysis — A General Psychology, ed. R. M. Loewenstein, L. M. Newman, M. Schuz & A. J. Solnit. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    583. Mahler, M. S. (1968) On Human Symbiosis and the Vicissitudes of Individuation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    584. Mahler, M. S. (1975) Discussion on Bernard L. Pacella's paper. JAPA, 23.
    585. Mahler, M. S. (1975) On the current status of infantile neurosis. JAPA, 23.
    586. Mahler, M. S. (1979) Selected Papers of Margaret S. Mahler, vol. 2. New York: Jason Aronson.
    587. Mahler, M. S. & Purer, M. (1968) On Human Symbiosis and the Vicissitudes of Individuation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    588. Mahler, M. S. & Gosliner, B. J. (1955) On Symbiotic child psychosis. PSOC, 10.
    589. Mahler, M. S., Pine, F. & Bergman, A. (1975) The Psychological Birth of the Human Infant. New York: Basic Books.
    590. Mahony, P. (1979) The boundaries of free association. Psychoanal. Contemp. Thought, 2.
    591. Malcove, L. (1975) The analytic situation (and Panel discussion). J. Phila. Assn. Psychoanal., 2.
    592. Marcovitz, E. (1973) On confidentiality in psychoanalysis. Bull. Phila. Assn. Psychoanal., 23.
    593. Marcus, I. M. & Francis, J. J. (1975) Masturbation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    594. Marty, P. & de M'Uzan, M. (1963) La pensйe opйratoire. Rev. Psychoanaltique, 27 suppl.
    595. Masson, J. M. (1980) The Oceanic Feeling. Boston: D. Reidel Publishing Company.
    596. Masters, W. H. & Johnson, V. E. (1966) Human Sexual Response. Boston: Little, Brown.
    597. McDaugall, J. (1984) The "dis-affected" patient. PQ, 53.
    598. McDevitt, J. B. (1975) Separation-individuation and object constancy. JAPA, 23.
    599. Meehl, P. E. (1962) Hedonic capacity. Bull. Menn. Clin., 39.
    600. Meissner, W. H. (1978) The Paranoid Process. New York: Aronson.
    601. Meissner, W. W. (1979) Internalization and object relations. JAPA, 27.
    602. Meissner, W. W. (1981) Internalization in Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    603. Meissner, W. W. (1981) Metapsychology: who needs it. JAPA, 29.
    604. Meissner, W. W., Mack, J. E. & Semrad, E. V. (1975) Classical Psychoanalysis. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, ed. A. M. Freedman, H. I. Kaplan & J. Sadock. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.
    605. Menninger, W. (1943) Characterologic and symptomatic expressions related to the anal phase of psycho sexual development. PQ, 12.
    606. Mesmer, Franz Anton (1965) The Nature of Hypnosis, ed. Ronald E. Shor and Martin T. Orne. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.
    607. Metcalf, D. & Spitz, R. A. (1978) The transitional object. In: Grolnick et al. (1978).
    608. Meyer, B. C. (1972) The contribution of psychoanalysis to biography. Psychoanal. Contemp. Sci., 1.
    609. Meyer, J. (1982) The theory of gender identity disorders. JAPA, 30.
    610. Meyer, J. (1985) Ego-dystonic homosexuality. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, 4th ed., ed. H. Kaplan & B. Sadock. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.
    611. Meyer, J. (1985) Paraphilia. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, ed. H. Kaplan & B. Sadock. Baltimore, Williams & Wilkins, 4th ed.
    612. Michaels, R. & Gaeger, R. K. Adaptation. PMC. Forthcoming.
    613. Milrod, D. (1982) The wished-for-self-image. PSOC, 37.
    614. Modell, A. H. (1958) The Theoretical implications of hallucinatory experiences in schizophrenia. JAFA, 6.
    615. Modell, A. H. (1965) Object Love and Reality. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    616. Modell, A. H. (1970) The transitional object and the creative act. PQ, 39.
    617. Modell, A. H. (1975) The ego and the id. IJP, 56.
    618. Money, J. & Green, R. (1969) Transsexualism and Sex Reassignment. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins Univ. Press.
    619. Monroe, R. R (1970) Episodic Behavior Disorders. Cambridge: Harvard Univ. Press.
    620. Moore, B. E. (164) Frigidity. PQ. 33.
    621. Moore, B. E. (1975) Freud and female sexuality. IJP, 57.
    622. Moore, B. E. (1975) Toward a clarification on the concept of narcissism. PSOC, 30.
    623. Moore, B. E. (1976) Freud and female sexuality. IJP, 57.
    624. Moore, B. E. (1977) Psychic representation and female orgasm. In: Female Psychology, ed. H. P. Blum. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    625. Moore, B. E. & Fine, B. D., eds. (1967) A Glossary of Psychoanalytic Terms and Concepts. New York: Amer. Psychoanal. Assn.
    626. Moore, B. E. & Rubinfine, D. Z. (1969) The mechanism of denial. Kris Study Group Monographs, New York: Int. Univ. Press, vol. 3.
    627. Moses, R. (1978) Adult psychic trauma. IJP, 59.
    628. Murray, C. D. (1930) Psychogenic factors in the etiology of ulcerative colitis and bloody diarrhea. Amer. J. Med. Sci., 180.
    629. Nagera, H., ed. (1966) Early Childhood Disturbances, the Infantile Neurosis, and the Adulthood Disturbances. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    630. Nagera, H. (1967) The concepts of structure and structuralization. PSOC, 22.
    631. Nagera, H. (1969—71) Basic Psychoanalytic Concepts. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    632. Nagera, H. (1976) Obsessional Neuroses. New York: Aronson.
    633. Natterson, J. M. (1980) The Dream in Clinical Practice. New York: Jason Aronson.
    634. Nemiah, J. C. & Sifneos, P. E. (1970) Affect and fantasy in patients with psychosomatic disorders. In: Modern Trends in Psychosomatic Medicine, ed. O. W. Hill. London: Butterworths, vol. 2.
    635. Neubaner, P. B. (1979) The role of insight in psychoanalysis JAPA, 27.
    636. Neubaner, P. B. (1982) Rivalry, envy, and Jealousy. PSOC, 37.
    637. Novick, J. (1982) Varieties of transference in the analysis of an adolescent. IJP, 42.
    638. Novick, J. & Kelly, K. (1970) Projection and externalization. PSOC, 25.
    639. Noy, P. Wollstein, S. & Kaplan-de-Nour, A. (1966) Clinical observations of the psychogenesis of impotence. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 39.
    640. Nunberg, H. (1948) The synthetic function of the ego. In: Practice and Theory of Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press, vol. 1.
    641. Nunberg, H. (1954) Evaluation of the results of psychoanalytic treatment. IJP, 35.
    642. Nunberg, H. (1955) Principles of Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    643. Ogden, T. (1982) Projective Identification and Psycho-therapeutic Technique. New York: Jason Aronson.
    644. Olinick, S. Z. (1964) The negative therapeutic reaction. IJP, 45.
    645. Olinick, S. Z. (1980) The Psychotheraputic Instrument. New York: Jason Aronson.
    646. Ornston, D. G. (1978) On projection. PSOC, 33.
    647. Ornston, D. G. (1982) Strachey's influence. IJP, 63.
    648. Ornston, D. G. (1985a) Freud's conception is different from Strachey's. JAPA, 33.
    649. Ornston, D. G. (1985b) The invention of "cathexes" and Strachey's strategy. Int. Rev. Psychoanal., 12.
    650. Ornston, D. G. (1988) How standard is the "Standard Edition? In Freud in Exile, ed. E. Timns & N. Segal. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.
    651. Orr, D. W. (1954) Transference and countertransference. JAPA, 2.
    652. Ostow, M. (1974) Sexual Deviation. New York: Quadrangle.
    653. Pacella, B. (1975) Early ego development and the deja vu. JAPA, 23.
    654. Panel (1957) Acting out and its relation to impulse disorders. M. Kanzer, reporter. JAPA, 5.
    655. Panel (1958) Problems of identity. D. Z. Rubinfine, reporter. JAPA, 6.
    656. Panel (1958) Technical aspects of regression during psychoanalysis. K. T. Calder, reporter. JAFA, 11.
    657. Panel (1963) The concept of the id. E. Marcovitz, reporter. JAPA, 11.
    658. Panel (1964) Depersonalization. W. A. Stewart, reporter. JAPA, 12.,.
    659. Panel (1966) Clinical and theoretical aspects of "as-if" characters. J. Weiss, reporter. JAPA, 11.
    660. Panel (1969) The theory of genital primacy in the light of ego psychology. M. Berezin, reporter. JAPA, 17.
    661. Panel (1971) Action, acting out, and the symptomatic act. N. Actins, reporter. JAPA, 18.
    662. Panel (1970) Psychoanalytic theory of affects. L. B. Lofgren, reporter. JAPA, 16.
    663. Panel (1970) The development of the child's sense of his sexual identity. Virginia, L. Glower, reporter. JAPA, 18.
    664. Panel (1970) The negative therapeutic reaction. S. L. Olinick, reporter. JAPA, 18.
    665. Panel (1972) Levels of confidentiality in the psychoanalytic situation. A. S. Watson, reporter JAPA, 20.
    666. Panel (1974) Toward a theory of affects. P. Castelneuvo-Tedesco, reporter. JAPA, 22. W.
    667. Panel (1975) The analytic situation. S. T. Shapiro, reporter. J. Phila. Aasn. Psychoanal.,2.
    668. Panel (1980) New directions in affect theory. E. P. Lester, reporter. JAPA, 30.
    669. Panel (1981) Insight. K. H. Blacker, reporter. JAPA, 29.
    670. Panel (1981) Masochism. W. Fischer, reporter. JAPA, 29.
    671. Panel (1982) Beyond lay analysis. H. Fischer, reporter. JAPA, 30.
    672. Panel (1983) Clinical aspects of character. M. Willick, reporter. JAPA, 31.
    673. Panel (1983) Theory of character. S. M. Abend, reporter. JAPA, 31.
    674. Panel (1984) The neutrality of the analyst in the analytic situation, R. J. Leider, reporter. JAPA, 32. (1985) Perspectives on the nature of psychic reality. E. Roughton, reporter. JAPA, 33.
    675. Panel (1987) Toward the further understanding of homosexual women. A Wolfson, reporter. JAPA, 35.
    676. Pao, P.-N. (1971) Elation, hypomania and mania. JAFA, 19.
    677. Parens, H. (1979) The Development of Aggression in Early Childhood. New York: Jason Aronson.
    678. Parens, H. (1980) Psychic development during the second and third years of life. In: The Course of Life, ed. S. Greenspan & G. Pollock. Washington: Nat. Inst. Health.
    679. Parens, H. & Saul, L. J. (1971) Dependence in Man. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    680. Person, E. & Ovesey, L. (1974) The transsexual syndrome in males. Amer. J. Psychother., 28.
    681. Person, E. & Ovesey, L. (1983) Psychoanalytic theories of gender identity. J. Amer. Acad. Psychoanal., 2.
    682. Peterfreund, E. & Schwartz, J. T. (1971) Information, systems, and Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    683. Peto, A. (1976) The etiological significance of the primal scene in perversions. PQ, 44.
    684. Pfeffer, A. Z. (1984) Modes of obsessional thinking. Presented at the New York Psychoanalytic Society, October 23.
    685. Piaget, J. (1937) The Construction of Reality in the Child. New York: Basic Books, 1954.
    686. Piaget, J. (1962) Play, Dreams and Imitation in Childhood New York: Norton.
    687. Piers, G. & Singer, M. B. (1953) Shame and Guilt. Springfield: Thomas; New ed., New York: Norton.
    688. Pine, F. (1985) Developmental Theory and Clinical Process. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.
    689. Poland, W. S. (1984) On the analyst's neutrality. JAFA, 32.
    690. Pollock, G. H. (1961) Mourning and adaptation. IJP, 42.
    691. Pollock, G. H. (1978) Process and affect. IJP, 59.
    692. Potamianau, A. (1985) The personal myth. PSOC, 40.
    693. Provence, S. & Lipton, R. (1962) Infants in Institutions. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    694. Pulver, S. E. Symptomatology. PMC. Forthcoming.
    695. Pulver, S. E. (1970) Narcissism. JAPA, 18.
    696. Rado, S. (1949) An adaptational view of sexual behavior In Psychosexual Development in Health and Disease, ed. P. H. Hock & J. Lubin. New York: Grune & Stratton.
    697. Rangell, L. Affects. PMC. Forthcoming.
    698. Rangell, L. (1959) The nature of conversion. JAPA, 7.
    699. Rangell, L. (1963) Structural problems in intrapsychic conflict. PSOC, 18.
    700. Rangell, L. (1966) An overview of the ending of an analysis. In: Psychoanalysis in Americas, ed. R. E. Litman. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    701. Rangell, L. (1968) A point of view on acting out. IJP, 49.
    702. Rangell, L. (1981) From insight to change. JAPA, 29.
    703. Rangell, L. (1981) Psychoanalysis and dynamic psychotherapy. PQ, 50.
    704. Rangell, L. (1983) Defense and resistance in psychoanalysis and life. JAPA, 31 (suppl.).
    705. Rangell, L. (1985) The object in psychoanalytic theory. JAPA, 33.
    706. Rank, O. (1909) The Myth of the Birth of the Hero. New York: Nerv. Ment. Dis. Monogr., 18.
    707. Rank, O. (1924) The Trauma of Birth. New York: Robert Brunner, 1952.
    708. Rapaport, D. (1942) Emotions and Memory. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1950.
    709. Rapaport, D. (1960) The structure of Psychoanalytic Theory. Psychol. Issues, monogr. 6, New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    710. Rapaport, D. & Gill, M. M. (1959) The points of view and assumptions of metapsychology. In: The Collected Papers of David Rapaport. New York: Basic Books, 1967.
    711. Rapoport, A. (1955) The role of symbols in human behavior. Psychiatric Research Reports, vol. 2, ed. J. S. Gottlieb et al. Washington: Amer. Psychiat. Assn.
    712. Rappaport, E. A. (1968) Beyond traumatic neurosis. IJP, 49.
    713. Reich, A. (1951) On countertransference. In: Psychoanalytic Contributions. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1973.
    714. Reich, A. (1953) Narcissistic object choice in women. JAPA, 1.
    715. Reich, A. (1954) Early identifications as archaic elements in the superego. JAPA, 2.
    716. Reich, A. (1960) Pathologic forms of self-esteem regulation. PSOC, 15.
    717. Reich, W. (1933) Character Analysis. New York: Orgone Press, 1949.
    718. Reich, W. (1933) Some circumscribed character forms. In: Character Analysis. New York: Orgone Institute Press.
    719. Reik, T. (1919) Ritual. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    720. Reiser, M. (1984) Mind, Brain and Body New York: Basic Books.
    721. Richards, A. D. (1985) Isakower-like experience on the couch. PQ. 54.
    722. Ricoeur, P. (1970) Freud and Philosophy. New Haven — Yale Univ. Press.
    723. Ricoeur, P. (1976) Interpretation Theory. Forth Worth-Texas Christian Univ. Press.
    724. Rinsley, D. B. (1982) Fairbairn's object relations and classical concepts of dynamics and structure. In: Borderline and Other Self Disorders' A Developmental and Object-Relations Respective New York: Jason Aronson.
    725. Rioch, M. (1970) The work of W. R Bion on groups. Psychiatry, 33.
    726. Ritvo, S. (1971) Late adolescence. PSOC, 18.
    727. Ritvo, S. (1974) Current status of the concept of infantile neurosis. PSOC, 29.
    728. Robbins, F & Sadow, L (1974) A developmental hypothesis of reality processing. JAPA, 22.
    729. Rodman, F. R. (1987) Introduction In the Spontaneous Gesture — Selected Letters of D. W. Winnicott, ed. F. R. Rodman Cambridge—Harvard Univ. Press.
    730. Roiphe, H. (1968) On an early genital phase. PSOC, 23.
    731. Roiphe, H. & Galenson, E. (1981) Infantile Roots of Sexual Identity. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    732. Rose, G. (1978) The creativity of everyday life. In: Grolnick et al (1978).
    733. Rose, H. (1928) A Handbook of Greek Mythology. London: Methuen.
    734. Rosenblatt, A. D. & Thickstun, J T. (1970) A study of the concept of psychic energy. IJP, 51.
    735. Rosenthal, S. M. (1968) The involutional depressive syndrome. Amer J. Psychiat., 124.
    736. Ross, N. (1967) The "as-if" concept. JAPA, 15.
    737. Ross, N. (1970) The primacy of genitality in the light of ego psychology. JAPA, 18.
    738. Rothstein, A. (1983) The Structural Hypothesis. New York: Int., Univ. Press.
    739. Roughton, R. Action and acting out. FMC. Forthcoming.
    740. Rubinstein, B. B. (1972) On metaphor and related phenomena. In: Psychoanalysis and Contemporary Science, ed. A. R. Holt & E. Peterfreund., New York: Int. Univ. Press, vol. 1.
    741. Rutter, M. (1972) Maternal Deprivation. Baltimore: Penguin Books.
    742. Rycroft, C. (1968) A critical Dictionary of Psychoanalysis New York: Basic Books.
    743. Sachs, D. M. (1979) On the relationship between psycho-analysis and psychoanalytic psychotherapy. Bull. Phila Assn. Psychoanal, 6.
    744. Sachs, H. (1942) The Creative Unconscious Cambridge, Mass.: Sci. Art. Publishers.
    745. Samuels, A. (1985) Jung and the Post-Jungians London — Routledge & Kegan Paul.
    746. Sandler, J. (1960) On the concept of the superego. PSOC, 15.
    747. Sandler, J., Dare, C. & Holder, A (1973) The negative therapeutic reaction. In: The Patient and the Analyst New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    748. Sandler, J. & Freud, A. (1985) The Analysis of Defense. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    749. Sandler, J., Hodler, A. & Meers, D. (1963) The ego ideal and the ideal self. PSOC, 18.
    750. Sandler, J., Kennedy, H & Tyson, R. L (1980) The Technique of Child Psychoanalysis. Cambridge—Harvard Univ. Press.
    751. Sandler, J. & Rosenblatt, B. (1962) The concept of the representational world. PSOC, 17.
    752. Sandler, J. & Sandier, A. M. (1978) On the development of object relationships and affects. IJP, 59.
    753. Sarlin, C. N. (1962) Depersonalization and derealization. JAPA, 10.
    754. Sarlin, C. N. (1970) The current status of the concept of genital primacy. JAPA. 18.
    755. Sarnoff, C. A. (1978) Latency. New York: Aronson.
    756. Saussure de, F. (1911) Course in General Linguistic. New York: McGraw Hill.
    757. Schafer. R. (1968) Aspects of Internalization. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    758. Schafer. R. (1974) Problems in Freud's psychology of women. JAPA, 22.
    759. Schafer. R. (1975) Psychoanalysis without psychodynamics. IJP, 56.
    760. Schafer. R. (1976) A New Language for Psychoanalysis. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.
    761. Schafer. R. (1983) The Analytic Attitude. New York: Basic Books.
    762. Schechner, R. & Schuman, M. (1976) Ritual, Play and Performance New York: Seabury Press.
    763. Schlesinger, N. & Robbins, F. P. (1983) A Developmental View of the Psychoanalytic Process. New York; Int. Univ. Press.
    764. Schneirla, T. C. (1959) An evolutionary and developmental theory of biphasic processes underlying approach and withdrawal. In: Nebraska Symposium on Motivation, ed. H. R. Jones. London: Univ. Nebraska Press.
    765. Schur, M. (1955) Comments on the metapsychology of somatization. PSOC, 10.
    766. Schur, M. (1966) The Id and the Regulatory Principles of Mental Functioning. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    767. Schuster. D. B. (1969) Bisexuality and body as phallus. PQ, 38.
    768. Schwartz, H. J., ed. (1984) Psychotherapy of the Combat Veteran. New York: SP Medical and Scientific Books.
    769. Segal, H. (1957) Notes on symbol formation. IJP, 39.
    770. Segal, H. (1964) Introduction to the Work of Melanie Klein. London: Hogarth Press, 1973.
    771. Segal, H. (1973) Introduction to the work of Melanie Klein. London: W. Heinemann.
    772. Segal, H. (1981) The Work of Hanna Segal. New York: Jason Aronson.
    773. Segal, H. (1986) Illumination of the dim, shadowy era. Sunday Times, London, May 11, 1986.
    774. Shane, M. Shane, E. (1982) Psychoanalytic theories of aggression. Psychoanal. Inquiry, 2.
    775. Shane, M. Shane, E. (1984) The end phase of analysis. JAPA, 32.
    776. Shane, M. Shane, E. (1985) Change and integration in psychoanalytic developmental theory. In: New Ideas in Psychoanalysis, ed. C. F. Settlage & R. Brockbank. Hillsdale, N. J. Analytic Press.
    777. Shapiro, T. (1979) Clinical Psycholinguistics. New York: Plenum Press.
    778. Shapiro, T. (1984) On neutrality. JAPA, 32.
    779. Shengold, L. (1967) The effects of overstimulation. IJP, 48.
    780. Shopper, M. (1979) The (re)discovery of the vagina and the importance of the menstrual tampon. In: Female Adolescent Development, ed. M. Sugar. New York: Brunner/Mazel.
    781. Sifneos, P. E. (1975) Problems of psychotherapy of patients with alexithymic characteristics and physical disease Psychother & Psychosom., 26.
    782. Slap, J. & Saykin, J. (1984) On the nature and organization of the repressed. Psychoanal. Inquiry, 4.
    783. Slovenko, R. (1973) Psychiatry and Law. Boston: Little, Brown.
    784. Smith, J. H. (1976) Language and the genealogy of the absent object. In: Psychiatry and the Humanities, vol. 1, ed. J. H. Smith. New Haven-Yale Univ. Press.
    785. Smith, J. H. ed. (1978) Psychoanalysis and Language. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.
    786. Smith, W. R. (1894) The Religion of the Semites. New York: Meridian Library, 1956.
    787. Socarides, C. W. (1963) The historical development of theoretical and clinical aspects of female homosexuality. JAPA, 11.
    788. Socarides, C. W. (1970) A psychoanalytic study of the desire for sexual transformation ("transsexualism"). IJP, 51.
    789. Socarides, C. W. (1978) Homosexuality. New York: Jason Aronson.
    790. Socarides, C. W. (1982) Abdication fathers, Homosexual Sons. In: Father and Child, ed. S. H. Cath, A. R. Gurwitt & J. M. Ross. Boston: Little, Brown.
    791. Solnit, A. J. & Ritvo, S. Instinct theory. PMC. Forthcoming.
    792. Sophocles. The Oedipus Cycle, tr. D. Fitts & R. Fitzgerald. New York: Harcourt, Brace & World, 1969.
    793. Sours, J. A. (1974) The anorexia nervosa syndrome. IJP, 55.
    794. Sours, J. A. (1980) Starving to Death in a Sia of Objects. New York: Aronson.
    795. Spence, J. T. & Helmrich, R. L. (1978) Masculinity and Femininity. Austin and London: Univ. of Texas Press.
    796. Sperber, D. (1974) Rethinking Symbolism. Cambridge: Cambridge Univ. Press.
    797. Sperling, M. (1976) Anorexia nervosa. In: Psychosomatic Disorders in Childhood, ed. O. Sperling. New York: Aronson.
    798. Spitz, R. A. (1945) Hospitalism. FSOC. 1.
    799. Spitz, R. A. (1946) Anaclitic depression. PSOC, 2.
    800. Spitz, R. A. (1946) Hospitalism: A follow-up report. PSOC, 2.
    801. Spitz, R. A. (1946) The smiling response. Genet. Psychol. Monagr. 34.
    802. Spitz, R. A. (1955) The primal cavity. PSOC, 10.
    803. Spitz, R. A. (1957) No and Yes. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    804. Spitz, R. A. (1959) A Genetic Field Theory of Ego Formation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    805. Spitz, R. A. (1965) The First Year of Life. New York:Int. Univ. Press.
    806. Spitz, R. A. & Wolf, K. M. (1946) The smiling response. Genet. Psycholol. Monogr., 34.
    807. Spruiell, V. The self. PMC. Forthcoming.
    808. Stamm, J. L. (1962) Altered ego states allied to the depersonalization. JAPA, 10.
    809. Stein, M. (1971) The principle of multiple function. Bull. Phila. Assn. Psychoanal., 21.
    810. Stekely, L. (1960) Success, success neurosis and the self. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 33.
    811. Sterba, R. E. (1936—37) Hardwцrterbuch der Psychoanalyse. Vienna: Int. Psychoanal. Verlag.
    812. Stern, D. N. (1974) The goal and structure of mother-infant play. J. Amer. Acad. Child Psychiat., 13.
    813. Stern, D. N. (1984) Affect attunement. In: Frontiers of Infant Psychiatry. New York: Basic Books, vol. 2.
    814. Stern, D. N. (1985) The Interpersonal World of the Infant New York: Basic Books.
    815. Stevens, A. (1982) Archetype. London: Rouledge & Kegan Paul.
    816. Stoller, R. J. (1971) The term "transvestism". Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 24.
    817. Stoller, R. J. (1972) The "bedrock" of masculinity and femininity: bisexuality. Arch. Gen. Psychiat., 26.
    818. Stoller, R. J. (1974) Hostility and mystery in perversion. IJP, 55.
    819. Stoller, R. J. (1975) Sex and Gender, vol. 2. New York: Jason Aronson.
    820. Stoller, R. J. (1976) Primary femininity. JAPA, 24 (5).
    821. Stoller, R. J. (1982) Hear miss. In: Eating, Sleeping, and Sexuality, ed. M. Zalea. New York: Brunner/ Mazel.
    822. Stoller, R. J. (1985) Observing the Erotic Imagination. New Haven: Yale Univ. Press.
    823. Stolorow, R. (1984) Self psychology — a structural psychology. In: Reflections on Self Psychology, ed. J. Lichtenberg & S. Kaplan Hillsdale, N. J.: Analytic Press.
    824. Stolorow, R. Transference. PMC. Forthcoming.
    825. Stone, L. (1954) The widening scope of indications for psychoanalysis. JAPA, 2.
    826. Stone, L. (1961) The Psychoanalytic Situation. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    827. Stone, L. (1967) The psychoanalytic situation and transference. JAPA, 15.
    828. Stone, L. (1971) Reflections on the psychoanalytic concept of aggression. FQ, 40.
    829. Stone, L. (1973) On resistance to the psychoanalytic process. In: Psychoanalysis and Contemporary Science, ed. B. B. Rubinstein. New York: Macmillan, vol. 2.
    830. Stone, M. H. (1980) Borderline Syndromes. New York: McGrow Hill.
    831. Strachey, J. (1934) The nature of the therapeutic action of psychoanalysis. IJP, 15.
    832. Strachey, J. (1962) The emergence of Freud's fundamental hypothesis. SE, 3.
    833. Strachey, J. (1963) Obituary (Joan Riviere). IJP, 44.
    834. Strachey, J. (1966) General preface. SE, 1.
    835. Swank, R. L. (1949) Combat exhaustion. J. Nerv. Ment. Dis., 109.
    836. Szekely, L. (1960) Success, success neurosis and the self. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 33.
    837. Taylor, G. J. (1977) Alexithymia and countertranceference. Psychother & Psychosom., 28.
    838. Ticho, E. (1972) Termination of psychoanalysis. PQ, 41.
    839. Tolpin, M. (1970) The infantile neurosis. PSOC, 25.
    840. Tolpin, M. (1971) On the beginnings of a cohesive self. PSOC. 26.
    841. Tolpin, M. & Kohut, H. (1980) The disorders of the self. In: The Course of Life, ed. S. Greenspan & G. Pollock. Washington, B. C.: U. S. Dept. Health and Human Services.
    842. Turkle, S. (1986) A review of Grosskurth, P.: Molanie Klein. New York: Times Books, Review, May 18, 1986.
    843. Tyson, P. Development. PMC. Forthcoming.
    844. Tyson, P. (1982) A developmental line of gender identity, gender role, and choice of love object. JAPA, 30.
    845. Tyson, P. & Tyson, R. L. Development. PMC. Forthcoming.
    846. Tyson, P. & Tyson, R. L. The psychoanalitic theory of development. PMC. Forthcoming.
    847. Tyson, P. & Tyson, R. L. (1984) Narcissism and superego development. JAPA, 34.
    848. Tyson, R. & Sundler, J. (1971) Problems in the selection of patients for psychoanalysis. Brit. J. Med. Psychol., 44.
    849. Valenstein, A. F. (1979) The concept of "classical" psycho-analysis. JAPA. 27. (suppl.).
    850. Volkan, V. D. (1981) Linking Objects and Linking Phenomena. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    851. Waelder, R. (1930) The principle of multiple function. PQ, 5.
    852. Waelder, R. (1962) Book review of Psychoanalysis, Scientific Method and Philosophy, ed. S. Hook. JAPA, 10.
    853. Waelder, R. (1962) Psychoanalysis scientific method, and philosophy. JAPA, 10.
    854. Waelder, R. (1963) Psychic determinism and the possibility of prediction. PQ, 32.
    855. Waelder, R. (1967) Trauma and the variety of extraordinary challenges. In: Fuest (1967).
    856. Waelder, R. (1967) Inhibitions, symptoms and anxiety: forty years later. PQ, 36.
    857. Waldhorn, H. F. (1960) Assessment of analyzability. PQ, 29.
    858. Waldhorn, H. F. & Fine, B. (1971) Trauma and symbolism. Kris Study Group monogr. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    859. Wallace, E. R. (1983) Freud and Anthropology. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    860. Wallerstein, R. Reality. PMC. Forthcoming.
    861. Wallerstein, R. (1965) The goals of psychoanalysis. JAPA, 13.
    862. Wallerstein, R. (1975) Psychotherapy and Psychoanalysis. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    863. Wallerstein, R. (1983) Defenses, defense mechanisms and the structure of the mind. JAPA, 31 (suppl.).
    864. Wallerstein, R. (1988) One psychoanalysis or many? IJP, 69.
    865. Wangh, M. (1979) Some psychoanalytic observations on boredom. IJP, 60.
    866. Weinshel, E. M. (1968) Some psychoanalytic considerations on moods. IJP, 51.
    867. Weinshel, E. M. (1971) The ego in health and normality. JAPA, 18.
    868. Weisman, A. D. (1972) On Dying and Denying. New York: Behavioral Publications.
    869. Weinstock, H. J. (1962) Successful treatment of ulcerative colitis by psychoanalysis. Brit. J. Psychoanal. Res., 6.
    870. Welmore, R. J. (1963) The role of grief in psychoanalysis. IJP. 44.
    871. Werner, H. & Kaplan, B. (1984) Symbol Formation. Hillsdale N. J.: Lawrence Eribaum.
    872. White. R. W. (1963) Ego and Reality in Psychoanalytic Theory. Psychol. Issues, 3.
    873. Whitman, R. M. (1963) Remembering and forgetting dreams in psychoanalysis. JAPA, 11.
    874. Wiedeman, G. Sexuality. PMC. Forthcoming.
    875. Wiedeman, G. (1962) Survey of psychoanalytic literature on overt male homosexuality. JAPA, 10.
    876. Wieder, H. (1966) Intellectuality. PSOC, 21.
    877. Wieder, H. (1978) The psychoanalytic treatment of preadolescents In Child Analysis and Therapy, ed. J. Glenn. New York Aronson.
    878. Willick, M. S. Defense. PMC. Forthcoming.
    879. Wilson, C. P. (1967) Stone as a symbol of teeth. PQ, 36.
    880. Wilson, C. P Hohan, C. & Mintz, I. (1983) Fear of Being Fat. New York: Aronson.
    881. Wilson, C. P. S Mintz, I. (1982) Abstaining and bulimic anorexics. Primary Care, 9.
    882. Wilson, E. O. (1978) On Human Nature. Cambridge: Harvard Univ. Press.
    883. Winnicott, C. (1978) D. W. W.: a reflection. In: Between Reality and Fantasy. New York: Jason Aronson.
    884. Winnicott, D. W. (1953) Transitional object and transitional phenomena. In: Collected Papers. New York Basic Books, 1958.
    885. Winnicott, D. W. (1956) Primary maternal preoccupation. In: Winnicott (1958).
    886. Winnicott, D. W. (1958) Collected Papers. New York: Basic Books, Inc.
    887. Winnicott, D. W. (1960) Ego distortions in terms of true and false self. In: The Maturational Processes and the Facilitating Environment. New York: Int. Univ. Press, 1965.
    888. Winnicott, D. W. (1960) The theory of the parent-infant relationship. In: Winnicott (1965).
    889. Winnicott, D. W. (1965) The Maturational Processes and the Facilitating Environment. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    890. Winnicott, D. W. (1971) Playing and Reality. New York: Basic Books.
    891. Winnicott, D. W. (1971) Therapeutic Consultations in Child Psychiatry. New York: Basic Books.
    892. Winnicott, D. W. (1977) The Piggle. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    893. Winson, J. (1985) Brain and Psyche. New York: Anchor Press.
    894. Wolf, E. S. (1976) Ambience and abstinence. Annu. Psycho-anal., 4.
    895. Wolf, E. S. (1980) On the developmental line of self-object relations. In: Advances in Self Psychology, ed. A. Goldberg. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    896. Wolf, E. S. (1983) Empathy and countertransference. In: The Future of Psychoanalysis, ed. A. Coldberg. New York: Int. Univ. Press.
    897. Wolf, E. S. (1984) Disruptions in the psychoanalytic treatment of disorders of the self. In: Kohut's Legacy, ed. P. Stepansky & A. Coldberg, Hillsdale, H. J.: Analytic Press, 1984.
    898. Wolf, E. S. (1984) Selfobject relations disorders. In: Character Pathology, ed. M. Zales. New York: Bruner/Mazel.
    899. Wolf, E. S. & Trosman, H. (1974) Freud and Popper-Lynkeus. JAPA, 22.
    900. Wolfenstein, M. (1966) How is mourning possible? PSOC, 21.
    901. Wolman, B. B. ed. (1977) The International Encyclopedia of Psychiatry, Psychology, Psychoanalysis, and Neurology. New York: Aesculapius.
    902. Wolpert, E. A. (1980) Major affective disorders. In: Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, ed. H. I. Kaplan, A. M. Freedman & B. J. Saddock. Boston: Williams & Wilkins, vol. 2.
    903. Wurmser, L. (1977) A defense of the use of metaphor in analytic theory formation. PQ, 46.
    904. Wurmser, L. (1981) The Mask of Shame. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins Univ. Press.
    905. Zetzel, E. R. (1956) Current concepts of transference. TJP, 37.

    Словарь психоаналитических терминов и понятий > БИБЛИОГРАФИЯ

  • 95 cure

    I [kjuə] 1. сущ.
    1) лечение, курс лечения
    2) излечение, исцеление; выздоровление

    He was beyond cure. — Он был неизлечим.

    The new treatment effected a miraculous cure. — Новый метод лечения чудесным образом исцелил больного.

    3)
    а) лекарство, средство излечения
    б) средство решения какой-л. проблемы

    The magic cure for inflation does not exist. — Не существует волшебного лекарства от инфляции.

    Syn:
    remedy 1.
    4)
    а) паства, церковный приход
    б) забота, попечение ( священника о пастве)
    Syn:
    care 1., charge 2.
    5) тех. вулканизация ( резины)
    2. гл.
    1) излечивать, исцелять

    Doctors are now able to cure people of many diseases which in former times would have killed them. — Теперь врачи могут излечить людей от многих болезней, которые в прежние времена были бы для них смертельными.

    The question is whether pulmonary consumption can be cured. — Вопрос в том, можно ли излечить чахотку.

    Time cured him of his grief. — Время излечило его горе.

    Syn:
    treat 2., heal
    2) заготавливать, консервировать
    Syn:
    ••

    What cannot be cured must be endured. — посл. Что нельзя исправить, то следует терпеть.

    II [kjuə] сущ.; разг.
    Syn:
    crank II 1., eccentric 2.

    Англо-русский современный словарь > cure

  • 96 the bottom line

    n AmE infml
    1)
    2)
    3)

    The bottom line is that you don't really care — Тебе просто наплевать, вот и все

    When you get down to the bottom line, it's only money that matters — В конце концов, главное - это деньги

    4)

    The bottom line is that nobody got killed — Главное, что никого не убили

    The new dictionary of modern spoken language > the bottom line

  • 97 with an eye to the main chance

    преследуя корыстные цели, стремясь к наживе, к выгоде; см. тж. the main chance

    She... combined feminine tact with masculine vigour, a heart of gold with an unerring eye for the main chance. (W. S. Maugham, ‘Cakes and Ale’, ch. XXII) —...женский такт сочетался в миссис Бартон Траффорд с мужской хваткой, золотое сердце с умением сделать правильный выбор.

    With the mercenary soldier's eye to the main chance, Crane took very good care of himself when no superior was present... and seemed to be fighting like a tiger, whenever an officer was about. (R. Aldington, ‘Roads to Glory’, ‘Killed in Action’) — Преследуя чисто корыстные цели, Крейн, как и подобало солдату-наемнику, очень заботился о собственной персоне, когда поблизости не было офицера... и делал вид, что дерется как лев, когда офицер был неподалеку.

    Large English-Russian phrasebook > with an eye to the main chance

  • 98 Historical Portugal

       Before Romans described western Iberia or Hispania as "Lusitania," ancient Iberians inhabited the land. Phoenician and Greek trading settlements grew up in the Tagus estuary area and nearby coasts. Beginning around 202 BCE, Romans invaded what is today southern Portugal. With Rome's defeat of Carthage, Romans proceeded to conquer and rule the western region north of the Tagus, which they named Roman "Lusitania." In the fourth century CE, as Rome's rule weakened, the area experienced yet another invasion—Germanic tribes, principally the Suevi, who eventually were Christianized. During the sixth century CE, the Suevi kingdom was superseded by yet another Germanic tribe—the Christian Visigoths.
       A major turning point in Portugal's history came in 711, as Muslim armies from North Africa, consisting of both Arab and Berber elements, invaded the Iberian Peninsula from across the Straits of Gibraltar. They entered what is now Portugal in 714, and proceeded to conquer most of the country except for the far north. For the next half a millennium, Islam and Muslim presence in Portugal left a significant mark upon the politics, government, language, and culture of the country.
       Islam, Reconquest, and Portugal Created, 714-1140
       The long frontier struggle between Muslim invaders and Christian communities in the north of the Iberian peninsula was called the Reconquista (Reconquest). It was during this struggle that the first dynasty of Portuguese kings (Burgundian) emerged and the independent monarchy of Portugal was established. Christian forces moved south from what is now the extreme north of Portugal and gradually defeated Muslim forces, besieging and capturing towns under Muslim sway. In the ninth century, as Christian forces slowly made their way southward, Christian elements were dominant only in the area between Minho province and the Douro River; this region became known as "territorium Portu-calense."
       In the 11th century, the advance of the Reconquest quickened as local Christian armies were reinforced by crusading knights from what is now France and England. Christian forces took Montemor (1034), at the Mondego River; Lamego (1058); Viseu (1058); and Coimbra (1064). In 1095, the king of Castile and Léon granted the country of "Portu-cale," what became northern Portugal, to a Burgundian count who had emigrated from France. This was the foundation of Portugal. In 1139, a descendant of this count, Afonso Henriques, proclaimed himself "King of Portugal." He was Portugal's first monarch, the "Founder," and the first of the Burgundian dynasty, which ruled until 1385.
       The emergence of Portugal in the 12th century as a separate monarchy in Iberia occurred before the Christian Reconquest of the peninsula. In the 1140s, the pope in Rome recognized Afonso Henriques as king of Portugal. In 1147, after a long, bloody siege, Muslim-occupied Lisbon fell to Afonso Henriques's army. Lisbon was the greatest prize of the 500-year war. Assisting this effort were English crusaders on their way to the Holy Land; the first bishop of Lisbon was an Englishman. When the Portuguese captured Faro and Silves in the Algarve province in 1248-50, the Reconquest of the extreme western portion of the Iberian peninsula was complete—significantly, more than two centuries before the Spanish crown completed the Reconquest of the eastern portion by capturing Granada in 1492.
       Consolidation and Independence of Burgundian Portugal, 1140-1385
       Two main themes of Portugal's early existence as a monarchy are the consolidation of control over the realm and the defeat of a Castil-ian threat from the east to its independence. At the end of this period came the birth of a new royal dynasty (Aviz), which prepared to carry the Christian Reconquest beyond continental Portugal across the straits of Gibraltar to North Africa. There was a variety of motives behind these developments. Portugal's independent existence was imperiled by threats from neighboring Iberian kingdoms to the north and east. Politics were dominated not only by efforts against the Muslims in
       Portugal (until 1250) and in nearby southern Spain (until 1492), but also by internecine warfare among the kingdoms of Castile, Léon, Aragon, and Portugal. A final comeback of Muslim forces was defeated at the battle of Salado (1340) by allied Castilian and Portuguese forces. In the emerging Kingdom of Portugal, the monarch gradually gained power over and neutralized the nobility and the Church.
       The historic and commonplace Portuguese saying "From Spain, neither a good wind nor a good marriage" was literally played out in diplomacy and war in the late 14th-century struggles for mastery in the peninsula. Larger, more populous Castile was pitted against smaller Portugal. Castile's Juan I intended to force a union between Castile and Portugal during this era of confusion and conflict. In late 1383, Portugal's King Fernando, the last king of the Burgundian dynasty, suddenly died prematurely at age 38, and the Master of Aviz, Portugal's most powerful nobleman, took up the cause of independence and resistance against Castile's invasion. The Master of Aviz, who became King João I of Portugal, was able to obtain foreign assistance. With the aid of English archers, Joao's armies defeated the Castilians in the crucial battle of Aljubarrota, on 14 August 1385, a victory that assured the independence of the Portuguese monarchy from its Castilian nemesis for several centuries.
       Aviz Dynasty and Portugal's First Overseas Empire, 1385-1580
       The results of the victory at Aljubarrota, much celebrated in Portugal's art and monuments, and the rise of the Aviz dynasty also helped to establish a new merchant class in Lisbon and Oporto, Portugal's second city. This group supported King João I's program of carrying the Reconquest to North Africa, since it was interested in expanding Portugal's foreign commerce and tapping into Muslim trade routes and resources in Africa. With the Reconquest against the Muslims completed in Portugal and the threat from Castile thwarted for the moment, the Aviz dynasty launched an era of overseas conquest, exploration, and trade. These efforts dominated Portugal's 15th and 16th centuries.
       The overseas empire and age of Discoveries began with Portugal's bold conquest in 1415 of the Moroccan city of Ceuta. One royal member of the 1415 expedition was young, 21-year-old Prince Henry, later known in history as "Prince Henry the Navigator." His part in the capture of Ceuta won Henry his knighthood and began Portugal's "Marvelous Century," during which the small kingdom was counted as a European and world power of consequence. Henry was the son of King João I and his English queen, Philippa of Lancaster, but he did not inherit the throne. Instead, he spent most of his life and his fortune, and that of the wealthy military Order of Christ, on various imperial ventures and on voyages of exploration down the African coast and into the Atlantic. While mythology has surrounded Henry's controversial role in the Discoveries, and this role has been exaggerated, there is no doubt that he played a vital part in the initiation of Portugal's first overseas empire and in encouraging exploration. He was naturally curious, had a sense of mission for Portugal, and was a strong leader. He also had wealth to expend; at least a third of the African voyages of the time were under his sponsorship. If Prince Henry himself knew little science, significant scientific advances in navigation were made in his day.
       What were Portugal's motives for this new imperial effort? The well-worn historical cliche of "God, Glory, and Gold" can only partly explain the motivation of a small kingdom with few natural resources and barely 1 million people, which was greatly outnumbered by the other powers it confronted. Among Portuguese objectives were the desire to exploit known North African trade routes and resources (gold, wheat, leather, weaponry, and other goods that were scarce in Iberia); the need to outflank the Muslim world in the Mediterranean by sailing around Africa, attacking Muslims en route; and the wish to ally with Christian kingdoms beyond Africa. This enterprise also involved a strategy of breaking the Venetian spice monopoly by trading directly with the East by means of discovering and exploiting a sea route around Africa to Asia. Besides the commercial motives, Portugal nurtured a strong crusading sense of Christian mission, and various classes in the kingdom saw an opportunity for fame and gain.
       By the time of Prince Henry's death in 1460, Portugal had gained control of the Atlantic archipelagos of the Azores and Madeiras, begun to colonize the Cape Verde Islands, failed to conquer the Canary Islands from Castile, captured various cities on Morocco's coast, and explored as far as Senegal, West Africa, down the African coast. By 1488, Bar-tolomeu Dias had rounded the Cape of Good Hope in South Africa and thereby discovered the way to the Indian Ocean.
       Portugal's largely coastal African empire and later its fragile Asian empire brought unexpected wealth but were purchased at a high price. Costs included wars of conquest and defense against rival powers, manning the far-flung navel and trade fleets and scattered castle-fortresses, and staffing its small but fierce armies, all of which entailed a loss of skills and population to maintain a scattered empire. Always short of capital, the monarchy became indebted to bankers. There were many defeats beginning in the 16th century at the hands of the larger imperial European monarchies (Spain, France, England, and Holland) and many attacks on Portugal and its strung-out empire. Typically, there was also the conflict that arose when a tenuously held world empire that rarely if ever paid its way demanded finance and manpower Portugal itself lacked.
       The first 80 years of the glorious imperial era, the golden age of Portugal's imperial power and world influence, was an African phase. During 1415-88, Portuguese navigators and explorers in small ships, some of them caravelas (caravels), explored the treacherous, disease-ridden coasts of Africa from Morocco to South Africa beyond the Cape of Good Hope. By the 1470s, the Portuguese had reached the Gulf of Guinea and, in the early 1480s, what is now Angola. Bartolomeu Dias's extraordinary voyage of 1487-88 to South Africa's coast and the edge of the Indian Ocean convinced Portugal that the best route to Asia's spices and Christians lay south, around the tip of southern Africa. Between 1488 and 1495, there was a hiatus caused in part by domestic conflict in Portugal, discussion of resources available for further conquests beyond Africa in Asia, and serious questions as to Portugal's capacity to reach beyond Africa. In 1495, King Manuel and his council decided to strike for Asia, whatever the consequences. In 1497-99, Vasco da Gama, under royal orders, made the epic two-year voyage that discovered the sea route to western India (Asia), outflanked Islam and Venice, and began Portugal's Asian empire. Within 50 years, Portugal had discovered and begun the exploitation of its largest colony, Brazil, and set up forts and trading posts from the Middle East (Aden and Ormuz), India (Calicut, Goa, etc.), Malacca, and Indonesia to Macau in China.
       By the 1550s, parts of its largely coastal, maritime trading post empire from Morocco to the Moluccas were under siege from various hostile forces, including Muslims, Christians, and Hindi. Although Moroccan forces expelled the Portuguese from the major coastal cities by 1550, the rival European monarchies of Castile (Spain), England, France, and later Holland began to seize portions of her undermanned, outgunned maritime empire.
       In 1580, Phillip II of Spain, whose mother was a Portuguese princess and who had a strong claim to the Portuguese throne, invaded Portugal, claimed the throne, and assumed control over the realm and, by extension, its African, Asian, and American empires. Phillip II filled the power vacuum that appeared in Portugal following the loss of most of Portugal's army and its young, headstrong King Sebastião in a disastrous war in Morocco. Sebastiao's death in battle (1578) and the lack of a natural heir to succeed him, as well as the weak leadership of the cardinal who briefly assumed control in Lisbon, led to a crisis that Spain's strong monarch exploited. As a result, Portugal lost its independence to Spain for a period of 60 years.
       Portugal under Spanish Rule, 1580-1640
       Despite the disastrous nature of Portugal's experience under Spanish rule, "The Babylonian Captivity" gave birth to modern Portuguese nationalism, its second overseas empire, and its modern alliance system with England. Although Spain allowed Portugal's weakened empire some autonomy, Spanish rule in Portugal became increasingly burdensome and unacceptable. Spain's ambitious imperial efforts in Europe and overseas had an impact on the Portuguese as Spain made greater and greater demands on its smaller neighbor for manpower and money. Portugal's culture underwent a controversial Castilianization, while its empire became hostage to Spain's fortunes. New rival powers England, France, and Holland attacked and took parts of Spain's empire and at the same time attacked Portugal's empire, as well as the mother country.
       Portugal's empire bore the consequences of being attacked by Spain's bitter enemies in what was a form of world war. Portuguese losses were heavy. By 1640, Portugal had lost most of its Moroccan cities as well as Ceylon, the Moluccas, and sections of India. With this, Portugal's Asian empire was gravely weakened. Only Goa, Damão, Diu, Bombay, Timor, and Macau remained and, in Brazil, Dutch forces occupied the northeast.
       On 1 December 1640, long commemorated as a national holiday, Portuguese rebels led by the duke of Braganza overthrew Spanish domination and took advantage of Spanish weakness following a more serious rebellion in Catalonia. Portugal regained independence from Spain, but at a price: dependence on foreign assistance to maintain its independence in the form of the renewal of the alliance with England.
       Restoration and Second Empire, 1640-1822
       Foreign affairs and empire dominated the restoration era and aftermath, and Portugal again briefly enjoyed greater European power and prestige. The Anglo-Portuguese Alliance was renewed and strengthened in treaties of 1642, 1654, and 1661, and Portugal's independence from Spain was underwritten by English pledges and armed assistance. In a Luso-Spanish treaty of 1668, Spain recognized Portugal's independence. Portugal's alliance with England was a marriage of convenience and necessity between two monarchies with important religious, cultural, and social differences. In return for legal, diplomatic, and trade privileges, as well as the use during war and peace of Portugal's great Lisbon harbor and colonial ports for England's navy, England pledged to protect Portugal and its scattered empire from any attack. The previously cited 17th-century alliance treaties were renewed later in the Treaty of Windsor, signed in London in 1899. On at least 10 different occasions after 1640, and during the next two centuries, England was central in helping prevent or repel foreign invasions of its ally, Portugal.
       Portugal's second empire (1640-1822) was largely Brazil-oriented. Portuguese colonization, exploitation of wealth, and emigration focused on Portuguese America, and imperial revenues came chiefly from Brazil. Between 1670 and 1740, Portugal's royalty and nobility grew wealthier on funds derived from Brazilian gold, diamonds, sugar, tobacco, and other crops, an enterprise supported by the Atlantic slave trade and the supply of African slave labor from West Africa and Angola. Visitors today can see where much of that wealth was invested: Portugal's rich legacy of monumental architecture. Meanwhile, the African slave trade took a toll in Angola and West Africa.
       In continental Portugal, absolutist monarchy dominated politics and government, and there was a struggle for position and power between the monarchy and other institutions, such as the Church and nobility. King José I's chief minister, usually known in history as the marquis of Pombal (ruled 1750-77), sharply suppressed the nobility and the
       Church (including the Inquisition, now a weak institution) and expelled the Jesuits. Pombal also made an effort to reduce economic dependence on England, Portugal's oldest ally. But his successes did not last much beyond his disputed time in office.
       Beginning in the late 18th century, the European-wide impact of the French Revolution and the rise of Napoleon placed Portugal in a vulnerable position. With the monarchy ineffectively led by an insane queen (Maria I) and her indecisive regent son (João VI), Portugal again became the focus of foreign ambition and aggression. With England unable to provide decisive assistance in time, France—with Spain's consent—invaded Portugal in 1807. As Napoleon's army under General Junot entered Lisbon meeting no resistance, Portugal's royal family fled on a British fleet to Brazil, where it remained in exile until 1821. In the meantime, Portugal's overseas empire was again under threat. There was a power vacuum as the monarch was absent, foreign armies were present, and new political notions of liberalism and constitutional monarchy were exciting various groups of citizens.
       Again England came to the rescue, this time in the form of the armies of the duke of Wellington. Three successive French invasions of Portugal were defeated and expelled, and Wellington succeeded in carrying the war against Napoleon across the Portuguese frontier into Spain. The presence of the English army, the new French-born liberal ideas, and the political vacuum combined to create revolutionary conditions. The French invasions and the peninsular wars, where Portuguese armed forces played a key role, marked the beginning of a new era in politics.
       Liberalism and Constitutional Monarchy, 1822-1910
       During 1807-22, foreign invasions, war, and civil strife over conflicting political ideas gravely damaged Portugal's commerce, economy, and novice industry. The next terrible blow was the loss of Brazil in 1822, the jewel in the imperial crown. Portugal's very independence seemed to be at risk. In vain, Portugal sought to resist Brazilian independence by force, but in 1825 it formally acknowledged Brazilian independence by treaty.
       Portugal's slow recovery from the destructive French invasions and the "war of independence" was complicated by civil strife over the form of constitutional monarchy that best suited Portugal. After struggles over these issues between 1820 and 1834, Portugal settled somewhat uncertainly into a moderate constitutional monarchy whose constitution (Charter of 1826) lent it strong political powers to exert a moderating influence between the executive and legislative branches of the government. It also featured a new upper middle class based on land ownership and commerce; a Catholic Church that, although still important, lived with reduced privileges and property; a largely African (third) empire to which Lisbon and Oporto devoted increasing spiritual and material resources, starting with the liberal imperial plans of 1836 and 1851, and continuing with the work of institutions like the Lisbon Society of Geography (established 1875); and a mass of rural peasants whose bonds to the land weakened after 1850 and who began to immigrate in increasing numbers to Brazil and North America.
       Chronic military intervention in national politics began in 19th-century Portugal. Such intervention, usually commencing with coups or pronunciamentos (military revolts), was a shortcut to the spoils of political office and could reflect popular discontent as well as the power of personalities. An early example of this was the 1817 golpe (coup) attempt of General Gomes Freire against British military rule in Portugal before the return of King João VI from Brazil. Except for a more stable period from 1851 to 1880, military intervention in politics, or the threat thereof, became a feature of the constitutional monarchy's political life, and it continued into the First Republic and the subsequent Estado Novo.
       Beginning with the Regeneration period (1851-80), Portugal experienced greater political stability and economic progress. Military intervention in politics virtually ceased; industrialization and construction of railroads, roads, and bridges proceeded; two political parties (Regenerators and Historicals) worked out a system of rotation in power; and leading intellectuals sparked a cultural revival in several fields. In 19th-century literature, there was a new golden age led by such figures as Alexandre Herculano (historian), Eça de Queirós (novelist), Almeida Garrett (playwright and essayist), Antero de Quental (poet), and Joaquim Oliveira Martins (historian and social scientist). In its third overseas empire, Portugal attempted to replace the slave trade and slavery with legitimate economic activities; to reform the administration; and to expand Portuguese holdings beyond coastal footholds deep into the African hinterlands in West, West Central, and East Africa. After 1841, to some extent, and especially after 1870, colonial affairs, combined with intense nationalism, pressures for economic profit in Africa, sentiment for national revival, and the drift of European affairs would make or break Lisbon governments.
       Beginning with the political crisis that arose out of the "English Ultimatum" affair of January 1890, the monarchy became discredtted and identified with the poorly functioning government, political parties splintered, and republicanism found more supporters. Portugal participated in the "Scramble for Africa," expanding its African holdings, but failed to annex territory connecting Angola and Mozambique. A growing foreign debt and state bankruptcy as of the early 1890s damaged the constitutional monarchy's reputation, despite the efforts of King Carlos in diplomacy, the renewal of the alliance in the Windsor Treaty of 1899, and the successful if bloody colonial wars in the empire (1880-97). Republicanism proclaimed that Portugal's weak economy and poor society were due to two historic institutions: the monarchy and the Catholic Church. A republic, its stalwarts claimed, would bring greater individual liberty; efficient, if more decentralized government; and a stronger colonial program while stripping the Church of its role in both society and education.
       As the monarchy lost support and republicans became more aggressive, violence increased in politics. King Carlos I and his heir Luís were murdered in Lisbon by anarchist-republicans on 1 February 1908. Following a military and civil insurrection and fighting between monarchist and republican forces, on 5 October 1910, King Manuel II fled Portugal and a republic was proclaimed.
       First Parliamentary Republic, 1910-26
       Portugal's first attempt at republican government was the most unstable, turbulent parliamentary republic in the history of 20th-century Western Europe. During a little under 16 years of the republic, there were 45 governments, a number of legislatures that did not complete normal terms, military coups, and only one president who completed his four-year term in office. Portuguese society was poorly prepared for this political experiment. Among the deadly legacies of the monarchy were a huge public debt; a largely rural, apolitical, and illiterate peasant population; conflict over the causes of the country's misfortunes; and lack of experience with a pluralist, democratic system.
       The republic had some talented leadership but lacked popular, institutional, and economic support. The 1911 republican constitution established only a limited democracy, as only a small portion of the adult male citizenry was eligible to vote. In a country where the majority was Catholic, the republic passed harshly anticlerical laws, and its institutions and supporters persecuted both the Church and its adherents. During its brief disjointed life, the First Republic drafted important reform plans in economic, social, and educational affairs; actively promoted development in the empire; and pursued a liberal, generous foreign policy. Following British requests for Portugal's assistance in World War I, Portugal entered the war on the Allied side in March 1916 and sent armies to Flanders and Portuguese Africa. Portugal's intervention in that conflict, however, was too costly in many respects, and the ultimate failure of the republic in part may be ascribed to Portugal's World War I activities.
       Unfortunately for the republic, its time coincided with new threats to Portugal's African possessions: World War I, social and political demands from various classes that could not be reconciled, excessive military intervention in politics, and, in particular, the worst economic and financial crisis Portugal had experienced since the 16th and 17th centuries. After the original Portuguese Republican Party (PRP, also known as the "Democrats") splintered into three warring groups in 1912, no true multiparty system emerged. The Democrats, except for only one or two elections, held an iron monopoly of electoral power, and political corruption became a major issue. As extreme right-wing dictatorships elsewhere in Europe began to take power in Italy (1922), neighboring Spain (1923), and Greece (1925), what scant popular support remained for the republic collapsed. Backed by a right-wing coalition of landowners from Alentejo, clergy, Coimbra University faculty and students, Catholic organizations, and big business, career military officers led by General Gomes da Costa executed a coup on 28 May 1926, turned out the last republican government, and established a military government.
       The Estado Novo (New State), 1926-74
       During the military phase (1926-32) of the Estado Novo, professional military officers, largely from the army, governed and administered Portugal and held key cabinet posts, but soon discovered that the military possessed no magic formula that could readily solve the problems inherited from the First Republic. Especially during the years 1926-31, the military dictatorship, even with its political repression of republican activities and institutions (military censorship of the press, political police action, and closure of the republic's rowdy parliament), was characterized by similar weaknesses: personalism and factionalism; military coups and political instability, including civil strife and loss of life; state debt and bankruptcy; and a weak economy. "Barracks parliamentarism" was not an acceptable alternative even to the "Nightmare Republic."
       Led by General Óscar Carmona, who had replaced and sent into exile General Gomes da Costa, the military dictatorship turned to a civilian expert in finance and economics to break the budget impasse and bring coherence to the disorganized system. Appointed minister of finance on 27 April 1928, the Coimbra University Law School professor of economics Antônio de Oliveira Salazar (1889-1970) first reformed finance, helped balance the budget, and then turned to other concerns as he garnered extraordinary governing powers. In 1930, he was appointed interim head of another key ministry (Colonies) and within a few years had become, in effect, a civilian dictator who, with the military hierarchy's support, provided the government with coherence, a program, and a set of policies.
       For nearly 40 years after he was appointed the first civilian prime minister in 1932, Salazar's personality dominated the government. Unlike extreme right-wing dictators elsewhere in Europe, Salazar was directly appointed by the army but was never endorsed by a popular political party, street militia, or voter base. The scholarly, reclusive former Coimbra University professor built up what became known after 1932 as the Estado Novo ("New State"), which at the time of its overthrow by another military coup in 1974, was the longest surviving authoritarian regime in Western Europe. The system of Salazar and the largely academic and technocratic ruling group he gathered in his cabinets was based on the central bureaucracy of the state, which was supported by the president of the republic—always a senior career military officer, General Óscar Carmona (1928-51), General Craveiro Lopes (1951-58), and Admiral Américo Tómaz (1958-74)—and the complicity of various institutions. These included a rubber-stamp legislature called the National Assembly (1935-74) and a political police known under various names: PVDE (1932-45), PIDE (1945-69),
       and DGS (1969-74). Other defenders of the Estado Novo security were paramilitary organizations such as the National Republican Guard (GNR); the Portuguese Legion (PL); and the Portuguese Youth [Movement]. In addition to censorship of the media, theater, and books, there was political repression and a deliberate policy of depoliticization. All political parties except for the approved movement of regime loyalists, the União Nacional or (National Union), were banned.
       The most vigorous and more popular period of the New State was 1932-44, when the basic structures were established. Never monolithic or entirely the work of one person (Salazar), the New State was constructed with the assistance of several dozen top associates who were mainly academics from law schools, some technocrats with specialized skills, and a handful of trusted career military officers. The 1933 Constitution declared Portugal to be a "unitary, corporative Republic," and pressures to restore the monarchy were resisted. Although some of the regime's followers were fascists and pseudofascists, many more were conservative Catholics, integralists, nationalists, and monarchists of different varieties, and even some reactionary republicans. If the New State was authoritarian, it was not totalitarian and, unlike fascism in Benito Mussolini's Italy or Adolf Hitler's Germany, it usually employed the minimum of violence necessary to defeat what remained a largely fractious, incoherent opposition.
       With the tumultuous Second Republic and the subsequent civil war in nearby Spain, the regime felt threatened and reinforced its defenses. During what Salazar rightly perceived as a time of foreign policy crisis for Portugal (1936-45), he assumed control of the Ministry of Foreign Affairs. From there, he pursued four basic foreign policy objectives: supporting the Nationalist rebels of General Francisco Franco in the Spanish Civil War (1936-39) and concluding defense treaties with a triumphant Franco; ensuring that General Franco in an exhausted Spain did not enter World War II on the Axis side; maintaining Portuguese neutrality in World War II with a post-1942 tilt toward the Allies, including granting Britain and the United States use of bases in the Azores Islands; and preserving and protecting Portugal's Atlantic Islands and its extensive, if poor, overseas empire in Africa and Asia.
       During the middle years of the New State (1944-58), many key Salazar associates in government either died or resigned, and there was greater social unrest in the form of unprecedented strikes and clandestine Communist activities, intensified opposition, and new threatening international pressures on Portugal's overseas empire. During the earlier phase of the Cold War (1947-60), Portugal became a steadfast, if weak, member of the US-dominated North Atlantic Treaty Organization alliance and, in 1955, with American support, Portugal joined the United Nations (UN). Colonial affairs remained a central concern of the regime. As of 1939, Portugal was the third largest colonial power in the world and possessed territories in tropical Africa (Angola, Mozambique, Guinea-Bissau, and São Tomé and Príncipe Islands) and the remnants of its 16th-century empire in Asia (Goa, Damão, Diu, East Timor, and Macau). Beginning in the early 1950s, following the independence of India in 1947, Portugal resisted Indian pressures to decolonize Portuguese India and used police forces to discourage internal opposition in its Asian and African colonies.
       The later years of the New State (1958-68) witnessed the aging of the increasingly isolated but feared Salazar and new threats both at home and overseas. Although the regime easily overcame the brief oppositionist threat from rival presidential candidate General Humberto Delgado in the spring of 1958, new developments in the African and Asian empires imperiled the authoritarian system. In February 1961, oppositionists hijacked the Portuguese ocean liner Santa Maria and, in following weeks, African insurgents in northern Angola, although they failed to expel the Portuguese, gained worldwide media attention, discredited the New State, and began the 13-year colonial war. After thwarting a dissident military coup against his continued leadership, Salazar and his ruling group mobilized military repression in Angola and attempted to develop the African colonies at a faster pace in order to ensure Portuguese control. Meanwhile, the other European colonial powers (Britain, France, Belgium, and Spain) rapidly granted political independence to their African territories.
       At the time of Salazar's removal from power in September 1968, following a stroke, Portugal's efforts to maintain control over its colonies appeared to be successful. President Americo Tomás appointed Dr. Marcello Caetano as Salazar's successor as prime minister. While maintaining the New State's basic structures, and continuing the regime's essential colonial policy, Caetano attempted wider reforms in colonial administration and some devolution of power from Lisbon, as well as more freedom of expression in Lisbon. Still, a great deal of the budget was devoted to supporting the wars against the insurgencies in Africa. Meanwhile in Asia, Portuguese India had fallen when the Indian army invaded in December 1961. The loss of Goa was a psychological blow to the leadership of the New State, and of the Asian empire only East Timor and Macau remained.
       The Caetano years (1968-74) were but a hiatus between the waning Salazar era and a new regime. There was greater political freedom and rapid economic growth (5-6 percent annually to late 1973), but Caetano's government was unable to reform the old system thoroughly and refused to consider new methods either at home or in the empire. In the end, regime change came from junior officers of the professional military who organized the Armed Forces Movement (MFA) against the Caetano government. It was this group of several hundred officers, mainly in the army and navy, which engineered a largely bloodless coup in Lisbon on 25 April 1974. Their unexpected action brought down the 48-year-old New State and made possible the eventual establishment and consolidation of democratic governance in Portugal, as well as a reorientation of the country away from the Atlantic toward Europe.
       Revolution of Carnations, 1974-76
       Following successful military operations of the Armed Forces Movement against the Caetano government, Portugal experienced what became known as the "Revolution of Carnations." It so happened that during the rainy week of the military golpe, Lisbon flower shops were featuring carnations, and the revolutionaries and their supporters adopted the red carnation as the common symbol of the event, as well as of the new freedom from dictatorship. The MFA, whose leaders at first were mostly little-known majors and captains, proclaimed a three-fold program of change for the new Portugal: democracy; decolonization of the overseas empire, after ending the colonial wars; and developing a backward economy in the spirit of opportunity and equality. During the first 24 months after the coup, there was civil strife, some anarchy, and a power struggle. With the passing of the Estado Novo, public euphoria burst forth as the new provisional military government proclaimed the freedoms of speech, press, and assembly, and abolished censorship, the political police, the Portuguese Legion, Portuguese Youth, and other New State organizations, including the National Union. Scores of political parties were born and joined the senior political party, the Portuguese Community Party (PCP), and the Socialist Party (PS), founded shortly before the coup.
       Portugal's Revolution of Carnations went through several phases. There was an attempt to take control by radical leftists, including the PCP and its allies. This was thwarted by moderate officers in the army, as well as by the efforts of two political parties: the PS and the Social Democrats (PPD, later PSD). The first phase was from April to September 1974. Provisional president General Antonio Spínola, whose 1974 book Portugal and the Future had helped prepare public opinion for the coup, met irresistible leftist pressures. After Spinola's efforts to avoid rapid decolonization of the African empire failed, he resigned in September 1974. During the second phase, from September 1974 to March 1975, radical military officers gained control, but a coup attempt by General Spínola and his supporters in Lisbon in March 1975 failed and Spínola fled to Spain.
       In the third phase of the Revolution, March-November 1975, a strong leftist reaction followed. Farm workers occupied and "nationalized" 1.1 million hectares of farmland in the Alentejo province, and radical military officers in the provisional government ordered the nationalization of Portuguese banks (foreign banks were exempted), utilities, and major industries, or about 60 percent of the economic system. There were power struggles among various political parties — a total of 50 emerged—and in the streets there was civil strife among labor, military, and law enforcement groups. A constituent assembly, elected on 25 April 1975, in Portugal's first free elections since 1926, drafted a democratic constitution. The Council of the Revolution (CR), briefly a revolutionary military watchdog committee, was entrenched as part of the government under the constitution, until a later revision. During the chaotic year of 1975, about 30 persons were killed in political frays while unstable provisional governments came and went. On 25 November 1975, moderate military forces led by Colonel Ramalho Eanes, who later was twice elected president of the republic (1976 and 1981), defeated radical, leftist military groups' revolutionary conspiracies.
       In the meantime, Portugal's scattered overseas empire experienced a precipitous and unprepared decolonization. One by one, the former colonies were granted and accepted independence—Guinea-Bissau (September 1974), Cape Verde Islands (July 1975), and Mozambique (July 1975). Portugal offered to turn over Macau to the People's Republic of China, but the offer was refused then and later negotiations led to the establishment of a formal decolonization or hand-over date of 1999. But in two former colonies, the process of decolonization had tragic results.
       In Angola, decolonization negotiations were greatly complicated by the fact that there were three rival nationalist movements in a struggle for power. The January 1975 Alvor Agreement signed by Portugal and these three parties was not effectively implemented. A bloody civil war broke out in Angola in the spring of 1975 and, when Portuguese armed forces withdrew and declared that Angola was independent on 11 November 1975, the bloodshed only increased. Meanwhile, most of the white Portuguese settlers from Angola and Mozambique fled during the course of 1975. Together with African refugees, more than 600,000 of these retornados ("returned ones") went by ship and air to Portugal and thousands more to Namibia, South Africa, Brazil, Canada, and the United States.
       The second major decolonization disaster was in Portugal's colony of East Timor in the Indonesian archipelago. Portugal's capacity to supervise and control a peaceful transition to independence in this isolated, neglected colony was limited by the strength of giant Indonesia, distance from Lisbon, and Portugal's revolutionary disorder and inability to defend Timor. In early December 1975, before Portugal granted formal independence and as one party, FRETILIN, unilaterally declared East Timor's independence, Indonesia's armed forces invaded, conquered, and annexed East Timor. Indonesian occupation encountered East Timorese resistance, and a heavy loss of life followed. The East Timor question remained a contentious international issue in the UN, as well as in Lisbon and Jakarta, for more than 20 years following Indonesia's invasion and annexation of the former colony of Portugal. Major changes occurred, beginning in 1998, after Indonesia underwent a political revolution and allowed a referendum in East Timor to decide that territory's political future in August 1999. Most East Timorese chose independence, but Indonesian forces resisted that verdict until
       UN intervention in September 1999. Following UN rule for several years, East Timor attained full independence on 20 May 2002.
       Consolidation of Democracy, 1976-2000
       After several free elections and record voter turnouts between 25 April 1975 and June 1976, civil war was averted and Portugal's second democratic republic began to stabilize. The MFA was dissolved, the military were returned to the barracks, and increasingly elected civilians took over the government of the country. The 1976 Constitution was revised several times beginning in 1982 and 1989, in order to reempha-size the principle of free enterprise in the economy while much of the large, nationalized sector was privatized. In June 1976, General Ram-alho Eanes was elected the first constitutional president of the republic (five-year term), and he appointed socialist leader Dr. Mário Soares as prime minister of the first constitutional government.
       From 1976 to 1985, Portugal's new system featured a weak economy and finances, labor unrest, and administrative and political instability. The difficult consolidation of democratic governance was eased in part by the strong currency and gold reserves inherited from the Estado Novo, but Lisbon seemed unable to cope with high unemployment, new debt, the complex impact of the refugees from Africa, world recession, and the agitation of political parties. Four major parties emerged from the maelstrom of 1974-75, except for the Communist Party, all newly founded. They were, from left to right, the Communists (PCP); the Socialists (PS), who managed to dominate governments and the legislature but not win a majority in the Assembly of the Republic; the Social Democrats (PSD); and the Christian Democrats (CDS). During this period, the annual growth rate was low (l-2 percent), and the nationalized sector of the economy stagnated.
       Enhanced economic growth, greater political stability, and more effective central government as of 1985, and especially 1987, were due to several developments. In 1977, Portugal applied for membership in the European Economic Community (EEC), now the European Union (EU) since 1993. In January 1986, with Spain, Portugal was granted membership, and economic and financial progress in the intervening years has been significantly influenced by the comparatively large investment, loans, technology, advice, and other assistance from the EEC. Low unemployment, high annual growth rates (5 percent), and moderate inflation have also been induced by the new political and administrative stability in Lisbon. Led by Prime Minister Cavaco Silva, an economist who was trained abroad, the PSD's strong organization, management, and electoral support since 1985 have assisted in encouraging economic recovery and development. In 1985, the PSD turned the PS out of office and won the general election, although they did not have an absolute majority of assembly seats. In 1986, Mário Soares was elected president of the republic, the first civilian to hold that office since the First Republic. In the elections of 1987 and 1991, however, the PSD was returned to power with clear majorities of over 50 percent of the vote.
       Although the PSD received 50.4 percent of the vote in the 1991 parliamentary elections and held a 42-seat majority in the Assembly of the Republic, the party began to lose public support following media revelations regarding corruption and complaints about Prime Minister Cavaco Silva's perceived arrogant leadership style. President Mário Soares voiced criticism of the PSD's seemingly untouchable majority and described a "tyranny of the majority." Economic growth slowed down. In the parliamentary elections of 1995 and the presidential election of 1996, the PSD's dominance ended for the time being. Prime Minister Antônio Guterres came to office when the PS won the October 1995 elections, and in the subsequent presidential contest, in January 1996, socialist Jorge Sampaio, the former mayor of Lisbon, was elected president of the republic, thus defeating Cavaco Silva's bid. Young and popular, Guterres moved the PS toward the center of the political spectrum. Under Guterres, the PS won the October 1999 parliamentary elections. The PS defeated the PSD but did not manage to win a clear, working majority of seats, and this made the PS dependent upon alliances with smaller parties, including the PCP.
       In the local elections in December 2001, the PSD's criticism of PS's heavy public spending allowed the PSD to take control of the key cities of Lisbon, Oporto, and Coimbra. Guterres resigned, and parliamentary elections were brought forward from 2004 to March 2002. The PSD won a narrow victory with 40 percent of the votes, and Jose Durão Barroso became prime minister. Having failed to win a majority of the seats in parliament forced the PSD to govern in coalition with the right-wing Popular Party (PP) led by Paulo Portas. Durão Barroso set about reducing government spending by cutting the budgets of local authorities, freezing civil service hiring, and reviving the economy by accelerating privatization of state-owned enterprises. These measures provoked a 24-hour strike by public-sector workers. Durão Barroso reacted with vows to press ahead with budget-cutting measures and imposed a wage freeze on all employees earning more than €1,000, which affected more than one-half of Portugal's work force.
       In June 2004, Durão Barroso was invited by Romano Prodi to succeed him as president of the European Commission. Durão Barroso accepted and resigned the prime ministership in July. Pedro Santana Lopes, the leader of the PSD, became prime minister. Already unpopular at the time of Durão Barroso's resignation, the PSD-led government became increasingly unpopular under Santana Lopes. A month-long delay in the start of the school year and confusion over his plan to cut taxes and raise public-sector salaries, eroded confidence even more. By November, Santana Lopes's government was so unpopular that President Jorge Sampaio was obliged to dissolve parliament and hold new elections, two years ahead of schedule.
       Parliamentary elections were held on 20 February 2005. The PS, which had promised the electorate disciplined and transparent governance, educational reform, the alleviation of poverty, and a boost in employment, won 45 percent of the vote and the majority of the seats in parliament. The leader of the PS, José Sôcrates became prime minister on 12 March 2005. In the regularly scheduled presidential elections held on 6 January 2006, the former leader of the PSD and prime minister, Aníbal Cavaco Silva, won a narrow victory and became president on 9 March 2006. With a mass protest, public teachers' strike, and street demonstrations in March 2008, Portugal's media, educational, and social systems experienced more severe pressures. With the spreading global recession beginning in September 2008, Portugal's economic and financial systems became more troubled.
       Owing to its geographic location on the southwestern most edge of continental Europe, Portugal has been historically in but not of Europe. Almost from the beginning of its existence in the 12th century as an independent monarchy, Portugal turned its back on Europe and oriented itself toward the Atlantic Ocean. After carving out a Christian kingdom on the western portion of the Iberian peninsula, Portuguese kings gradually built and maintained a vast seaborne global empire that became central to the way Portugal understood its individuality as a nation-state. While the creation of this empire allows Portugal to claim an unusual number of "firsts" or distinctions in world and Western history, it also retarded Portugal's economic, social, and political development. It can be reasonably argued that the Revolution of 25 April 1974 was the most decisive event in Portugal's long history because it finally ended Portugal's oceanic mission and view of itself as an imperial power. After the 1974 Revolution, Portugal turned away from its global mission and vigorously reoriented itself toward Europe. Contemporary Portugal is now both in and of Europe.
       The turn toward Europe began immediately after 25 April 1974. Portugal granted independence to its African colonies in 1975. It was admitted to the European Council and took the first steps toward accession to the European Economic Community (EEC) in 1976. On 28 March 1977, the Portuguese government officially applied for EEC membership. Because of Portugal's economic and social backwardness, which would require vast sums of EEC money to overcome, negotiations for membership were long and difficult. Finally, a treaty of accession was signed on 12 June 1985. Portugal officially joined the EEC (the European Union [EU] since 1993) on 1 January 1986. Since becoming a full-fledged member of the EU, Portugal has been steadily overcoming the economic and social underdevelopment caused by its imperial past and is becoming more like the rest of Europe.
       Membership in the EU has speeded up the structural transformation of Portugal's economy, which actually began during the Estado Novo. Investments made by the Estado Novo in Portugal's economy began to shift employment out of the agricultural sector, which, in 1950, accounted for 50 percent of Portugal's economically active population. Today, only 10 percent of the economically active population is employed in the agricultural sector (the highest among EU member states); 30 percent in the industrial sector (also the highest among EU member states); and 60 percent in the service sector (the lowest among EU member states). The economically active population numbers about 5,000,000 employed, 56 percent of whom are women. Women workers are the majority of the workforce in the agricultural and service sectors (the highest among the EU member states). The expansion of the service sector has been primarily in health care and education. Portugal has had the lowest unemployment rates among EU member states, with the overall rate never being more than 10 percent of the active population. Since joining the EU, the number of employers increased from 2.6 percent to 5.8 percent of the active population; self-employed from 16 to 19 percent; and employees from 65 to 70 percent. Twenty-six percent of the employers are women. Unemployment tends to hit younger workers in industry and transportation, women employed in domestic service, workers on short-term contracts, and poorly educated workers. Salaried workers earn only 63 percent of the EU average, and hourly workers only one-third to one-half of that earned by their EU counterparts. Despite having had the second highest growth of gross national product (GNP) per inhabitant (after Ireland) among EU member states, the above data suggest that while much has been accomplished in terms of modernizing the Portuguese economy, much remains to be done to bring Portugal's economy up to the level of the "average" EU member state.
       Membership in the EU has also speeded up changes in Portuguese society. Over the last 30 years, coastalization and urbanization have intensified. Fully 50 percent of Portuguese live in the coastal urban conurbations of Lisbon, Oporto, Braga, Aveiro, Coimbra, Viseu, Évora, and Faro. The Portuguese population is one of the oldest among EU member states (17.3 percent are 65 years of age or older) thanks to a considerable increase in life expectancy at birth (77.87 years for the total population, 74.6 years for men, 81.36 years for women) and one of the lowest birthrates (10.59 births/1,000) in Europe. Family size averages 2.8 persons per household, with the strict nuclear family (one or two generations) in which both parents work being typical. Common law marriages, cohabitating couples, and single-parent households are more and more common. The divorce rate has also increased. "Youth Culture" has developed. The young have their own meeting places, leisure-time activities, and nightlife (bars, clubs, and discos).
       All Portuguese citizens, whether they have contributed or not, have a right to an old-age pension, invalidity benefits, widowed persons' pension, as well as payments for disabilities, children, unemployment, and large families. There is a national minimum wage (€385 per month), which is low by EU standards. The rapid aging of Portugal's population has changed the ratio of contributors to pensioners to 1.7, the lowest in the EU. This has created deficits in Portugal's social security fund.
       The adult literacy rate is about 92 percent. Illiteracy is still found among the elderly. Although universal compulsory education up to grade 9 was achieved in 1980, only 21.2 percent of the population aged 25-64 had undergone secondary education, compared to an EU average of 65.7 percent. Portugal's higher education system currently consists of 14 state universities and 14 private universities, 15 state polytechnic institutions, one Catholic university, and one military academy. All in all, Portugal spends a greater percentage of its state budget on education than most EU member states. Despite this high level of expenditure, the troubled Portuguese education system does not perform well. Early leaving and repetition rates are among the highest among EU member states.
       After the Revolution of 25 April 1974, Portugal created a National Health Service, which today consists of 221 hospitals and 512 medical centers employing 33,751 doctors and 41,799 nurses. Like its education system, Portugal's medical system is inefficient. There are long waiting lists for appointments with specialists and for surgical procedures.
       Structural changes in Portugal's economy and society mean that social life in Portugal is not too different from that in other EU member states. A mass consumption society has been created. Televisions, telephones, refrigerators, cars, music equipment, mobile phones, and personal computers are commonplace. Sixty percent of Portuguese households possess at least one automobile, and 65 percent of Portuguese own their own home. Portuguese citizens are more aware of their legal rights than ever before. This has resulted in a trebling of the number of legal proceeding since 1960 and an eight-fold increase in the number of lawyers. In general, Portuguese society has become more permissive and secular; the Catholic Church and the armed forces are much less influential than in the past. Portugal's population is also much more culturally, religiously, and ethnically diverse, a consequence of the coming to Portugal of hundreds of thousands of immigrants, mainly from former African colonies.
       Portuguese are becoming more cosmopolitan and sophisticated through the impact of world media, the Internet, and the World Wide Web. A prime case in point came in the summer and early fall of 1999, with the extraordinary events in East Timor and the massive Portuguese popular responses. An internationally monitored referendum in East Timor, Portugal's former colony in the Indonesian archipelago and under Indonesian occupation from late 1975 to summer 1999, resulted in a vote of 78.5 percent for rejecting integration with Indonesia and for independence. When Indonesian prointegration gangs, aided by the Indonesian military, responded to the referendum with widespread brutality and threatened to reverse the verdict of the referendum, there was a spontaneous popular outpouring of protest in the cities and towns of Portugal. An avalanche of Portuguese e-mail fell on leaders and groups in the UN and in certain countries around the world as Portugal's diplomats, perhaps to compensate for the weak initial response to Indonesian armed aggression in 1975, called for the protection of East Timor as an independent state and for UN intervention to thwart Indonesian action. Using global communications networks, the Portuguese were able to mobilize UN and world public opinion against Indonesian actions and aided the eventual independence of East Timor on 20 May 2002.
       From the Revolution of 25 April 1974 until the 1990s, Portugal had a large number of political parties, one of the largest Communist parties in western Europe, frequent elections, and endemic cabinet instability. Since the 1990s, the number of political parties has been dramatically reduced and cabinet stability increased. Gradually, the Portuguese electorate has concentrated around two larger parties, the right-of-center Social Democrats (PSD) and the left-of-center Socialist (PS). In the 1980s, these two parties together garnered 65 percent of the vote and 70 percent of the seats in parliament. In 2005, these percentages had risen to 74 percent and 85 percent, respectively. In effect, Portugal is currently a two-party dominant system in which the two largest parties — PS and PSD—alternate in and out of power, not unlike the rotation of the two main political parties (the Regenerators and the Historicals) during the last decades (1850s to 1880s) of the liberal constitutional monarchy. As Portugal's democracy has consolidated, turnout rates for the eligible electorate have declined. In the 1970s, turnout was 85 percent. In Portugal's most recent parliamentary election (2005), turnout had fallen to 65 percent of the eligible electorate.
       Portugal has benefited greatly from membership in the EU, and whatever doubts remain about the price paid for membership, no Portuguese government in the near future can afford to sever this connection. The vast majority of Portuguese citizens see membership in the EU as a "good thing" and strongly believe that Portugal has benefited from membership. Only the Communist Party opposed membership because it reduces national sovereignty, serves the interests of capitalists not workers, and suffers from a democratic deficit. Despite the high level of support for the EU, Portuguese voters are increasingly not voting in elections for the European Parliament, however. Turnout for European Parliament elections fell from 40 percent of the eligible electorate in the 1999 elections to 38 percent in the 2004 elections.
       In sum, Portugal's turn toward Europe has done much to overcome its backwardness. However, despite the economic, social, and political progress made since 1986, Portugal has a long way to go before it can claim to be on a par with the level found even in Spain, much less the rest of western Europe. As Portugal struggles to move from underde-velopment, especially in the rural areas away from the coast, it must keep in mind the perils of too rapid modern development, which could damage two of its most precious assets: its scenery and environment. The growth and future prosperity of the economy will depend on the degree to which the government and the private sector will remain stewards of clean air, soil, water, and other finite resources on which the tourism industry depends and on which Portugal's world image as a unique place to visit rests. Currently, Portugal is investing heavily in renewable energy from solar, wind, and wave power in order to account for about 50 percent of its electricity needs by 2010. Portugal opened the world's largest solar power plant and the world's first commercial wave power farm in 2006.
       An American documentary film on Portugal produced in the 1970s described this little country as having "a Past in Search of a Future." In the years after the Revolution of 25 April 1974, it could be said that Portugal is now living in "a Present in Search of a Future." Increasingly, that future lies in Europe as an active and productive member of the EU.

    Historical dictionary of Portugal > Historical Portugal

  • 99 في

    في \ a; an; each; every: twice a day; 80 miles an hour. at: (showing where): at home; at the office, (showing a point of time) at midday; at 4 o’clock; He was married at 18, (after an adj) good at English; quick at sums. by: during: We travelled by night. in: showing where: In bed; in London; in the box; in his speech, showing condition In a hurry; in trouble, showing a direction; into He fell in the river. He put his hand in his pocket, showing when; during In the past; in January 1980; in the evening, showing what sth. contains or includes There are 60 minutes in an hour. Is he in your team?, showing what sb. wears He was in his best suit, showing a shape or arrangement They stood in a row, showing employment or activity or an event He’s in the navy. She was killed in the accident. on: showing when: on Monday; on May the 6th. showing the state of sb.:: Are you here on business or on holiday?. per: for each: He earns $8000 per annum (for each year). \ في (أيّ مَكَان)‏ \ anywhere: in or to any place: Are you going anywhere?. \ See Also إلى( إلى)‏ \ في \ home: to or at one’s house: Go home! Is your son home yet?. \ See Also إلى البيت \ في \ inside: on (or to) the inside. \ See Also إلى الداخل \ في \ inland: away from the sea: We crossed the coast and flew inland. \ See Also إلى داخل البلاد \ في \ indoors: into (or in) a building: He went (or He stayed) indoors because of the rain. \ See Also إلى داخل البيت \ في \ on board: on (or onto) a ship or aeroplane: There are 70 men on board. Can I go on board the aircraft?. \ See Also إلى دَاخِل الطَّائِرَة \ في \ upstairs: on, at or to a higher floor; up the stairs; at the top of the stairs: She went upstairs because her room is upstairs. She has an upstairs bedroom. \ See Also إلى الدَّور الأَعْلى \ في \ low: to or in a low position: The sun had sunk low in the sky. \ See Also إلى وَضْع مُنْخفِض \ في \ whereabouts: in or near which place: Whereabouts did you find this ring?. \ See Also قرب أيّ مكان؟ \ في \ upstream: against the flow of the stream; up the river: They rowed (the boat) upstream. \ See Also نَحْوَ أعلى النَّهر \ في الاتجاه المعاكس \ backward(s): towards the back: He fell over backwards. \ في أَثَر \ after: following, in search of: I ran after him but could not catch him. The police are after him. \ في أثناء الخِدْمَة (خارج أوقات الخِدمة)‏ \ on duty, (off duty): at work (not at work): The night nurse has 12 hours on duty, then 12 hours off duty. She went on duty at 18.00 and came off duty at 06.00. \ في أثناء ذلك \ meanwhile, meantime: (in) the time between: You’ll have to wait till he’s ready; but you can read this (in the) meanwhile. \ في إجازة \ off: free from work: My employer gave me the afternoon off. \ See Also عطلة (عُطْلَة)‏ \ في أَحْسَن الأَحْوَال \ at best: in the most hopeful conditions: At best, we can’t be ready till Tuesday. \ في آخر \ eventually: in the end: The car kept stopping, but we got home eventually. ultimately: in the end: We must all, ultimately, die. \ See Also نهاية الأمر \ في آخر رَمَق \ on one’s last legs: (of a person or thing) not expected to last much longer; worn out; almost in ruins: That company is on its last legs. \ في آخر لحظة \ in the nick of time: just in time; almost too late: She saved him in the nick of time from falling over the cliff. \ في أَرْجَاء \ about: from place to place in: We wandered about the town. round: (also around) from place to place: He wandered (a)round (the town). We travelled (a)round (the country). \ في أَسْفَل \ under: (also underneath), in a lower position. underneath: (of position) below: It was hidden underneath the floor boards. \ See Also الأسفل (الأَسْفَل)‏ \ في الأَصْل \ originally: in the beginning: This school was originally a rich man’s home. \ في الأَعْلَى \ up: in or to higher position: She lives up in the hills. \ في أغلب الظَّنّ \ doubtless: probably: It will doubtless rain on the day of the garden party. \ في أَفْضَل حَالَة \ at one’s best: in one’s best state: My garden is at its best in spring. \ في أقلّ مِن \ within: in less than: He will arrive within an hour. I live within a mile of the sea. \ في الأمام \ in front: at the front: You go in front and I’ll follow. \ في أَوَاخِر \ late: near the end of a period of time: Late in the year; in the late afternoon. \ في الأوْج \ in full swing: (of an activity) at its highest point; very busy: The party was in full swing when I arrived. \ في أوجِ الإزْهَار \ in bloom: flowering: The roses are in bloom now. \ في أيّ مَكَان \ anywhere: in no matter what place: Put it down anywhere. \ في أيّ وقت \ ever: (esp. in a negative sentence or a question) at any time: Nobody ever writes to me. Have you ever been to Rome? If you ever go there, you must see St. Peter’s cathedral. \ في أيّ وقت مَضَى \ ever: (in a comparative sentence) at any time: He’s working harder than ever. This is the best book I’ve ever read. \ في بادئ الأمر \ at first: at the beginning: At first the new school seemed strange, but then we got used to it. \ في البَدْء \ primarily: mainly; in the first place: This book is written primarily for foreigners. \ See Also أصلا (أَصْلاً)، أساسا (أساسًا)‏ \ في بعض الوقت \ part-time: for only part of the usual working time: She’s a part-time teacher. \ في البيت \ at home: in one’s house: He’s at home in the evenings. \ في البيت المُجَاوِر \ next, next door: in the next house: He lives next door. He is my nextdoor neighbour. \ في تَحَسُّن (من النّاحية الصحّية)‏ \ on the mend: getting better in health (after an illness). \ في تِلْكَ الحالةِ \ in that case: if that happens, or has happened: He may be late. In that case, we shall go without him, if that happens, or has happened He may be late. In that case, we shall go without him. \ في تِلْكَ اللَّحظة \ just: (with continuous tenses; always directly before the present participle) at this moment; at that moment: We’re just starting dinner. We were just starting dinner when he arrived. \ في التَّوّ \ straight away: at once. \ في جانب \ in favour of: supporting: I’m in favour of your plans. \ في الجَانِب الآخَر مِن \ across: on the other side of: My home is across the river. \ في جانب \ for: in favour of: Are you for this idea or against it?. \ See Also صف (صَفّ)‏ \ في جزء أدنى مِن \ down: at a lower level: My house is a little way down the hill. \ في الجِوَار \ about: around; near: There’s a lot of illness about. I went out early, when no one was about (when no one else was out). \ في الحَال \ at once: without delay: Stop that at once!. away: right away; straight away. immediately: at once. instantly: at once. on the spot: in that place and at that moment: He gave me the bill and I paid it on the spot. readily: without delay: The book you need is not readily obtainable. straight away: at once. \ في حَالَةِ \ at: (showing a state): at war; at play. on: showing the state of sth.: The house is on fire. \ في حَالَة حَسَنَة \ well, (better, best): the opposite of ill and unwell; in good health: Don’t you feel well? You’ll soon get better if you drink this medicine. How are you? Very well, thank you. I feel best in the early morning (better than at any other time). \ في حَالَة سَيِّئَة \ in a bad way: in a bad state. \ في حَالَة عَدَم توفُّر \ failing: giving a second choice of action, if the first choice fails: Ask John to do it. Failing him, ask Michael. \ في حَالَة فَوْضَى \ chaotic: in a state of chaos: The young teacher had a chaotic classroom. \ في حَالَةِ وُجُود \ in case of: in the event of; if there is: In case of fire, ring the bell. \ في حَالَةِ ما إِذَا \ in case: because of the possibility of sth. happening: Take a stick, in case you meet a snake. \ في حركة دائِمة \ on the move: moving; travelling: He’s always on the move and never settles for long. \ في الحَقِيقَة \ as a matter of fact, in fact: really; in truth: The dog seemed dead but in fact it was only asleep. As a matter of fact, I don’t like Michael. in point of fact: actually, in fact. in reality: in fact. really: truly; in fact: Is he really your son? He does not look like you!. \ في حَيْرَة من أَمْره \ at one’s wits’ end: too worried by difficulties to know what to do. \ في حين \ whereas: but: They are looking for a house, whereas we would rather live in a flat. \ في حينه \ round: following a regular course: Wait till your turn comes round. \ في الخَارِج \ abroad: in or to another country: I spent my holiday abroad. out: in (or into) the open; away from shelter; in (or into) view: Don’t stand out in the rain. The ship was far out at sea. out of door, outdoors: in the open air; not in a house: I like sleeping out of doors under the stars. outside: not within; in the open air; on the outer side: It’s raining outside. The cup is blue outside, and white inside. overseas: across the sea; (to the British, the mainland of Europe is abroad but it is not overseas): She is working overseas, in South America. \ في خِدمَة... \ at one’s service: ready to fulfil one’s needs: The hotel car is at your service if you want to go anywhere. \ في خَريف العُمر \ middle-aged: neither young nor old; aged between about 40 and 65. \ في خطٍّ مُستقيم \ as the crow flies: in a straight line: It is 5 miles away by road, but only 2 miles as the crow flies. \ فِي الخَفَاء \ stealth: by stealth using secret and quiet action: He got into the house by stealth, not by force. \ في خِلال \ in: showing a space of time before sth. will happen; after: I’ll come in a few days (or in a minute). in the course of: during: In the course of the morning I had seven visitors. \ في الدّاخل \ in: in a building, esp. at home, work or where one is expected to be: Is anyone in? I’m afraid Mr. Jones is out, but he’ll be in at 5 o’clock. \ في داخِل \ in: showing a direction; into: He fell in the river. He put his hand in his pocket. inside: on (or to) the inside of: Please wait inside the room. \ في داخِل النَّفْس \ inwardly: secretly; as regards one’s inner feelings: I was inwardly delighted, but I pretended not to care. \ في دَرَجَة الغَلَيان \ on the boil: boiling; at this heat. \ في ذلك المكان \ there: at that place: I live there. \ في رأيي \ to my mind: in my opinion: To my mind, this is most dishonest. \ في سَبِيل \ in the process of: to be doing: I am in the process of painting my house. sake, for the sake, of, for sb.’s sake: for the good of; so as to help: Soldiers die for the sake of their county (or for their country’s sake). Don’t take any risks for my sake, for the desire of Why ruin your health for the sake of a little pleasure?. \ في سِنّ المُرَاهَقَة \ teenage: in one’s teens: a teenage girl. \ في شكّ \ in doubt: uncertain: When in doubt, ask your father. \ في صحَّة جيِّدة \ fit: healthy: We take exercise so as to keep fit. \ في صَفّ \ in single file: in one line, one behind the other: We had to ride in single file down the narrow path. \ في الطّابِق الأَسْفل \ downstairs: at the bottom of the stairs; in a room at that level: I’ll wait for you downstairs. \ في الطّابِق الفوقانيّ \ overhead: above one’s head: a noise in the room overhead; clouds in the sky overhead. \ في طَرَف \ up: along (up and down are both used like this, although the course may be quite level): He lives just up the road. \ في طريق النُّور \ in sb.’s light: preventing light from reaching him: I can’t read if you stand in my light. \ في الظّاهر \ outwardly: as regards the appearance (compared with the hidden facts or inner feelings): She was outwardly calm but inwardly full of anger. \ في العَام \ annual: happening every year; of a year: an annual feast; the annual production of oil. \ في عَجلة من أمره \ in a hurry: Ants are always in a hurry. \ في العَرَاء \ in the open: outside in the air: I like to sleep out in the open, under she stars. outdoors, out of doors: the open air; not in a building: Go outdoors and play football. \ في (عُرض) البَحْر \ at sea: on the sea; far from land: a storm at sea. \ في عُطلة \ on holiday, on vacation: having a holiday: The schools are on holiday. We’re going on vacation to the sea. \ See Also إجازة( إجازة)‏ \ في غابر الأزمان (كان يا ما كان...)‏ \ once upon a time: (used at the beginning of stories). \ في الغَالِب \ mainly: chiefly; mostly. \ في غالِب الظنّ \ probably: almost certainly; with little doubt: You’re probably right. \ في غاية الجُنون \ raving mad: noisily and violently mad. \ في غَمْضَة عَيْن \ in no time: very quickly; very soon: If you follow this path, you’ll get there in no time. \ في غِيَابِه \ behind sb.’s back: when someone is not present: He tells untrue stories about me behind my back. \ في كُلٍّ \ a; an; each; every: twice a day. 80 miles an hour. ten pence a packet. \ في كل مكان \ everywhere: in all places: I’ve looked for it everywhere. \ في كل وقت \ ever: at all times; always: I shall stay there for ever. \ في لحظة خاطفة \ in a flash: very quickly and suddenly: He seized the money and was gone in a flash. \ في اللحظة المناسبة \ in the nick of time: just in time; almost too late: She saved him in the nick of time from falling over the cliff. \ في اللَّيْل \ at night: during the night. overnight: for the night: I shall stay at a hotel overnight and come back tomorrow, on the night before; during the night I packed my suitcase overnight, so as to be ready to leave at sunrise. His car was stolen overnight. \ في المائَة \ per cent: for, out, of, each hundred: Six per cent of the boys failed the exam, (one part) of each hundred I’m a 100 per cent in agreement with you. About 70 per cent (written as 70%) of the people are farmers. \ في المُتَنَاوَل \ forthcoming: supplied when needed: We wanted a new school clock, but the money was not forthcoming. \ في مُتَناوَل \ within: inside; not beyond; within reach; within one’s powers. \ في متناول اليَد \ at hand: near; within reach: Help was at hand. handy: near; easily reached when wanted: Keep that book handy so that you can look at it often. \ في مَجْمُوعَة بين \ among(st): in the middle of; mixed with; surrounded by: I found this letter among my books. There is a secret enemy amongst us. \ في مِحْنة خَطَر \ in distress: (of a ship or aeroplane) in dangerous trouble; needing help. \ في المُدّة الأخيرة \ lately: not long ago; in the near past: Have you seen her lately?. \ في المرَّة التالية \ next: the next time: I’ll give it to you when I next see you. \ See Also القادمة \ في مُقَابِل \ for: showing that something is as a return or in place of: I gave him $5 for his help. Will you change this old car for a new one?. in return (for): in exchange or payment for: Give her some flowers in return for her kindness. \ في المقام الأوّل \ firstly: as the first reason, fact, etc: I need a hot drink. Firstly, because I’m cold; secondly, because I’m thirsty. \ في المقدمة \ in front: at the front: You go in front and I’ll follow. \ في مَكَان \ in sb,’s stead: in sb.’s place; instead of sb.. \ See Also بدلا من (بدلاً من)‏ \ في مَكَان آخَر \ elsewhere: in some other place. \ في المَكَان \ in position: in the correct position. \ See Also المَوضِع الصَّحيح \ في مَكَان قَريب \ by: near: He stood by and watched them. \ في مَكَانٍ ما \ somewhere: in or to some place (but usu. anywhere in negative sentences and questions): I’ve met him somewhere before. Let’s go somewhere peaceful (to some peaceful place). \ في المكان والزّمان المذكورين \ on the spot: in that place and at that moment: Fortunately a doctor was on the spot when she broke her leg. \ في مكانه \ belong: to be in the right place: This book belongs on the top shelf. \ See Also موضِعِه المناسب \ في مَلْعَبِه \ at home: (of a match) on one’s own field: Our team are playing at home tomorrow. \ في مُنْتَصَف الطَّريق \ midway: halfway; in the middle: The station is midway between the two villages. \ في مَوعِد لاَ يَتَجَاوَز \ by: before; not later than: Can you finish this by Tuesday? They ought to be here by now. \ في المَوْعِد المحدَّد \ on time: exactly at the appointed moment: The bus always leaves on time. \ في مياه أعمق من قَامَته \ out of one’s depth: in water that is too deep to stand up in: Don’t go out of your depth unless you can swim. \ في النّادِر \ rarely: not often; hardly at all: She rarely smokes. \ في نظر \ in the eyes of: in the opinion of: In his mother’s eyes he can do no wrong. \ في نَظَري \ to my mind: in my opinion: To my mind, this is most dishonest. \ في النّهايَة \ at last: in the end, after much delay: The train was very slow, but we got there at last. at length: at last; in the end: He waited two hours. At length he went home. finally: lastly; in the end. \ في نِهايَة الأمْر \ in the long run: after a period of time; in the end: It’ll be cheaper in the long run to buy good quality shoes. \ See Also عَلَى المدى الطويل \ في هذا الوقت \ now: (in a written account) at the time that is being described: The war was now over. \ في هَذا المَكَان \ about: here: Is anyone about?. \ في هذه الأَثْنَاء \ meanwhile, meantime: (in) the time between: You’ll have to wait till he’s ready; but you can read this (in the) meanwhile. \ في هذه الأَيَّام \ nowadays: in these times (compared with the past): Travel is much easier nowadays. today: the present time: the scientists of today. \ في هذه الحالة \ all right: (also alright), in that case: You don’t want it? All right, I’ll give it to someone else. \ في هذه اللَّحْظَة \ just: (with continuous tenses; always directly before the present participle) at this moment; at that moment: We’re just starting dinner. We were just starting dinner when he arrived. just now: at this moment: I’m busy just now. \ في الهواء الطَّلْق \ in the open: outside in the air: I like to sleep out in the open, under the stars. out of doors, outdoors: in the open air; not in a house: I like sleeping out of doors under the stars. outdoors, out of doors: the open air; not in a building: Go outdoors and play football. \ في الوَاقِع \ in reality: in fact. \ في الوَاقِع \ actually: in fact; really: She looks about thirty, but actually she’s thirty-nine. as a matter of fact, in fact: really; in truth: The dog seemed dead but in fact it was only asleep. As a matter of fact, I don’t like Michael. in point of fact: actually, in fact. truly: really: Are you truly sorry for your crimes?. virtually: actually but not officially: He was virtually a prisoner in his home, as he did not dare to go out while the police were watching. \ في الوَسَط \ halfway: between two places and at an equal distance from them: His house is halfway between yours and mine. \ في وَسْط المسافة \ halfway: between two places and at an equal distance from them: His house is halfway between yours and mine. \ في وَضَح (النهار)‏ \ broad: (of daylight) full; complete: The bank was robbed in broad daylight. \ في وَضع لا يجوز فيه رَكْل الكُرة \ offside: (of a player in football, etc.) breaking a rule by being in a position in which play is not allowed. \ في الوَقْت الحَاضِر \ at present: now; at the present time: At present I have no job, but I shall get one soon. for the time being: for the present: I have no job, but I’m helping my father for the time being. now: at the present time: Where are you working now? Now is the time to plant those seeds. today: the present time: the scientists of today. \ في وَقْتٍ لاَحِق \ after: later: She came first and he arrived soon after. \ في وقتٍ ما \ sometime: (often two words, some time) at a time not exactly known or stated: Come again sometime. He left sometime after dinner. \ في وقتٍ متأخر \ late: after the proper or usual time; not early: We always go to bed very late. He arrived too late for dinner. \ في وقتٍ متأخر مِن \ late: near the end of a period of time: Late in the year; in the late afternoon. \ في الوَقْتِ المُقَرَّر \ round: following a regular course: Wait till your turn comes round. \ في وَقْتٍ من الأوقات \ ever: (esp. in a negative sentence or a question) at any time: Nobody ever writes to me. Have you ever been to Rome? If you ever go there, you must see St. Peter’s cathedral. \ في الوَقْتِ المناسب \ early: in good time for one’s purpose; before the fixed time: We arrived early and got the best seats. in due course: later; after a reasonable delay: He will get better in due course. in good time: slightly early: He came in good time for the meeting. \ في وقت واحد \ at a time: together: They arrived three at a time (in groups of three). \ في يوم من الأيام \ once upon a time: (used at the beginning of stories). \ See Also كان يا ما كان

    Arabic-English dictionary > في

Страницы

См. также в других словарях:

  • care killed the — ● cat …   Useful english dictionary

  • care killed the cat — Cf. curiosity killed the cat. There is some shift in meaning between care = worry, grief and care = carefulness, caution, and in quot. 1962 the meaning is ‘care lavished on the cat’, rather than care exercised by it. 1598–9 SHAKESPEARE Much Ado… …   Proverbs new dictionary

  • care — I (New American Roget s College Thesaurus) I v. i. like, have affection (for). See care, pity, feeling. II Solicitude Nouns 1. (concern) care, concern, consideration, solicitude, anxiety, heed, heedfulness; conscientiousness, watchfulness,… …   English dictionary for students

  • care — see care killed the cat don’t care was made to care children are certain cares, but uncertain comforts take care of the pence and the pounds will take care of themselves …   Proverbs new dictionary

  • killed two birds with one stone — took care of two things at once …   English contemporary dictionary

  • Curiosity killed the cat — This article is about the proverb. For other uses, see Curiosity killed the cat (disambiguation). A curious kitten. Curiosity killed the cat is a proverb used to warn of the dangers of unnecessary investigation or experimentation. A less… …   Wikipedia

  • Guantanamo detainees' medical care — Abandoned hospital used in Camp X Ray in early 2002 …   Wikipedia

  • Health care system — A health care system is the organization of people, institutions, and resources to deliver health care services to meet the health needs of target populations. There is a wide variety of health care systems around the world, with as many… …   Wikipedia

  • Direct primary care — In the USA Direct Primary Care (DPC) is primary care offered direct to the consumer, without insurance intervention. It is an umbrella term which incorporates various health care delivery systems that involve direct financial relationships… …   Wikipedia

  • Cremation of Care — The pyrotechnic climax to the 1907 Cremation of Care The Cremation of Care is an annual theatrical production written, produced and performed by and for members of the Bohemian Club, and staged at the Bohemian Grove near Monte Rio, California at… …   Wikipedia

  • Martin Luther King, Jr. Multi-Service Ambulatory Care Center — Los Angeles County Department of Health Services Geography Location Willowbrook uninc …   Wikipedia

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»